ePMP 3000, ePMP 3000L,

ePMP 3000MP, Force 300,

400C and 425 Series
Subscriber Modules
Accuracy

While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Cambium Networks
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the
information obtained herein. Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described
herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make
changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or
changes. Cambium does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product,
software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of
others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Cambium
products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country.
Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce such
Cambium products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights

This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party software products described in this document may
include or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in
semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for
Cambium, its licensors, and other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted
material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works
of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or the 3 rd
Party software supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this document may not
be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the
express written permission of Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of Cambium products shall not be
deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights,
patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied software, except for the normal
non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Restrictions

Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law.
No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means,
without prior written permission of Cambium.

License Agreements

The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is furnished by
express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.

High Risk Materials

Cambium and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for any high
risk activities or uses of its products including, but not limited to, the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft
navigation or aircraft communication systems, air traffic control, life support, or weapons systems (“High
Risk Use”). Any High Risk Use is unauthorized, is made at your own risk and you shall be responsible for
any and all losses, damage or claims arising out of any High Risk Use.

© 2021 Cambium Networks Limited. All Rights Reserved.

PMP-2461_000V012 (APRIL 2021)

Contents

Safety and regulatory information .......................................................................................................................................9

Important safety information .........................................................................................................................................9

Important Regulatory Information ............................................................................................................................ 10

About This User Guide .............................................................................................................. 11

General information .................................................................................................................................................................. 12

Contacting Cambium Networks ................................................................................................................................. 12

Purpose ................................................................................................................................................................................. 12

Cross-references ............................................................................................................................................................... 12

Problems and warranty ........................................................................................................................................................... 13

Reporting problems ......................................................................................................................................................... 13

Security advice ........................................................................................................................................................................... 14

Precautionary statements ...................................................................................................................................................... 15

Warning ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15

Attention ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15

Note ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15

Caring for the environment ................................................................................................................................................... 16

In EU countries ................................................................................................................................................................... 16

In non-EU countries.......................................................................................................................................................... 16

Chapter 1: Product Description .............................................................................................. 1-1

Overview of ePMP ....................................................................................................................................................................1-2

Purpose – ePMP Portfolio .............................................................................................................................................1-2

ePMP 3000 ........................................................................................................................................................................1-2

ePMP 3000L .....................................................................................................................................................................1-3

Force 300-25 .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

Force 300-19 ......................................................................................................................................................................1-5

Force 300-19R .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-6

Force 300-16 ......................................................................................................................................................................1-7

Force 300-13 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-8

Force 300-13L .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

Force 300 CSM ...............................................................................................................................................................1-10

PAGE 1
 Typical installation equipment .................................................................................................................................. 1-11

Wireless operation ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

MU-MIMO ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13

MIMO.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-13

Smart beamforming (ePMP 2000/3000 series) .............................................................................................. 1-13

Time-division duplexing .............................................................................................................................................. 1-14

OFDM and channel bandwidth................................................................................................................................. 1-14

Adaptive modulation .................................................................................................................................................... 1-14

Radar avoidance ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-15

Encryption ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-15

Country codes ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-15

Further reading on the wireless operation.......................................................................................................... 1-16

System management ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-17

Management agent ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-17

Webserver ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-17

SNMP ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-18

Network Time Protocol (NTP) .................................................................................................................................. 1-18

Software upgrade .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-18

Further reading on system management ............................................................................................................ 1-18

Chapter 2: System Hardware ................................................................................................. 2-1

Site planning ..............................................................................................................................................................................2-2

Site installation .................................................................................................................................................................2-2

Grounding and lightning protection .......................................................................................................................2-2

Lightning protection zones.........................................................................................................................................2-3

ePMP 3000 Access Point .....................................................................................................................................................2-5

ePMP 3000 Access Point description ...................................................................................................................2-5

ePMP 3000 Access Point part numbers .............................................................................................................. 2-6

ePMP 3000 Access Point mounting bracket ..................................................................................................... 2-8

ePMP 3000 Access Point interfaces...................................................................................................................... 2-9

ePMP 3000 Access Point specifications.............................................................................................................. 2-9

ePMP 3000 Access Point heater ............................................................................................................................2-10

ePMP 3000 Access Point wind loading ..............................................................................................................2-10

ePMP 3000 Access Point software packages ................................................................................................... 2-11

ePMP 3000L Access Point ................................................................................................................................................ 2-12

ePMP 3000L Access Point description ............................................................................................................... 2-12

PAGE 2
 ePMP 3000L Access Point part numbers .......................................................................................................... 2-13

ePMP 3000L Access Point mounting bracket ................................................................................................. 2-14

ePMP 3000L Access Point interfaces .................................................................................................................. 2-15

ePMP 3000L Access Point specifications .......................................................................................................... 2-15

ePMP 3000L Access Point heater ......................................................................................................................... 2-16

ePMP 3000L Access Point wind loading............................................................................................................ 2-16

ePMP 3000L Access Point software packages ............................................................................................... 2-17

Force 300-25 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-18

Force 300-25 integrated description .................................................................................................................. 2-18

Force 300-25 part numbers ..................................................................................................................................... 2-19

Force 300-25 mounting bracket ...........................................................................................................................2-20

Force 300-25 interfaces ...........................................................................................................................................2-20

Force 300-25 specifications..................................................................................................................................... 2-21

Force 300-25 heater.................................................................................................................................................... 2-21

Force 300-25 wind loading ..................................................................................................................................... 2-22

Force 300-25 software packages ......................................................................................................................... 2-23

Force 300-25L ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-25

Force 300-25L integrated description ............................................................................................................... 2-25

Force 300-25L key features .................................................................................................................................... 2-25

Force 300-25L part numbers ................................................................................................................................. 2-26

Force 300-25L interfaces ......................................................................................................................................... 2-28

Force 300-25L specifications ................................................................................................................................. 2-28

Force 300-25L heater ................................................................................................................................................ 2-29

Force 300-25L wind loading................................................................................................................................... 2-29

Force 300-25L software packages ......................................................................................................................2-30

Force 300-19 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-31

Force 300-19 integrated description .................................................................................................................. 2-31

Force 300-19 part numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 2-31

Force 300-19 mounting bracket ............................................................................................................................ 2-33

Force 300-19 interfaces ............................................................................................................................................ 2-33

Force 300-19 specifications .................................................................................................................................... 2-33

Force 300-19 heater ................................................................................................................................................... 2-34

Force 300-19 wind loading ...................................................................................................................................... 2-35

Force 300-19 software packages .......................................................................................................................... 2-36

Force 300-19R........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-37

PAGE 3
 Force 300-19R integrated description ............................................................................................................... 2-37

Force 300-19R part numbers .................................................................................................................................. 2-37

Force 300-19R mounting bracket ......................................................................................................................... 2-39

Force 300-19R interfaces ......................................................................................................................................... 2-39

Force 300-19R specifications ................................................................................................................................. 2-39

Force 300-19R heater ............................................................................................................................................... 2-40

Force 300-19R wind loading .................................................................................................................................... 2-41

Force 300-19R software packages....................................................................................................................... 2-42

Force 300-16 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-43

Force 300-16 integrated description .................................................................................................................. 2-43

Force 300-16 part numbers ..................................................................................................................................... 2-43

Force 300-16 interfaces ............................................................................................................................................ 2-45

Force 300-16 specifications .................................................................................................................................... 2-45

Force 300-16 heater ...................................................................................................................................................2-46

Force 300-16 wind loading ......................................................................................................................................2-46

Force 300-16 software packages .......................................................................................................................... 2-47

Force 300-13 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-48

Force 300-13 integrated description .................................................................................................................. 2-48

Force 300-13 part numbers ..................................................................................................................................... 2-48

Force 300-13 interfaces ............................................................................................................................................2-50

Force 300-13 specifications.....................................................................................................................................2-50

Force 300-13 heater..................................................................................................................................................... 2-51

Force 300-13 wind loading ....................................................................................................................................... 2-51

Force 300-13 software packages .......................................................................................................................... 2-52

Force 300-13L ........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-53

Force 300-13L integrated description ................................................................................................................ 2-53

Force 300-13L part numbers .................................................................................................................................. 2-54

Force 300-13L interfaces .......................................................................................................................................... 2-55

Force 300-13L specifications .................................................................................................................................. 2-55

Force 300-13L wind loading.................................................................................................................................... 2-56

Force 300-13L LEDs.................................................................................................................................................... 2-57

Force 300-13L software packages ....................................................................................................................... 2-57

Force 300 CSM ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-58

Force 300 CSM Connectorized Subscriber Module description ............................................................. 2-58

Force 300 CSM part numbers ................................................................................................................................ 2-59

PAGE 4
 Force 300 CSM interfaces ....................................................................................................................................... 2-60

Force 300 CSM specifications ............................................................................................................................... 2-60

Force 300 CSM heater ................................................................................................................................................ 2-61

Force 300 CSM wind loading .................................................................................................................................. 2-61

Force 300 CSM software packages ..................................................................................................................... 2-62

ePMP MP3000 MicroPOP .................................................................................................................................................. 2-63

ePMP MP 3000 integrated description .............................................................................................................. 2-63

ePMP MP 3000 part numbers ................................................................................................................................ 2-63

ePMP MP 3000 interfaces ........................................................................................................................................ 2-65

ePMP MP 3000 specifications ................................................................................................................................ 2-65

ePMP MP 3000 heater ............................................................................................................................................... 2-66

ePMP MP 3000 wind loading.................................................................................................................................. 2-66

ePMP MP 3000 software packages ..................................................................................................................... 2-67

Force 425 ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-68

Force 425 integrated description ......................................................................................................................... 2-68

Force 425 part numbers ........................................................................................................................................... 2-68

Force 425 mounting bracket with Range Extender ......................................................................................2-70

Force 425 interfaces ...................................................................................................................................................2-70

Force 425 specifications ...........................................................................................................................................2-70

Force 425 heater ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-71

Force 425 wind loading.............................................................................................................................................. 2-71

Force 425 software packages ................................................................................................................................ 2-72

Force 400C ............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-73

Force 400C integrated description ..................................................................................................................... 2-73

Force 400C part numbers ....................................................................................................................................... 2-73

Force 400C interfaces ............................................................................................................................................... 2-74

Force 400C specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2-75

Force 400C heater ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-75

Force 400C wind loading......................................................................................................................................... 2-75

Force 400C software packages ............................................................................................................................ 2-76

Power supply .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-77

Power supply description ......................................................................................................................................... 2-77

Power supply part numbers .................................................................................................................................... 2-77

Power supply interfaces ............................................................................................................................................ 2-78

Power supply specifications .................................................................................................................................... 2-79

PAGE 5
 Power supply location considerations ................................................................................................................ 2-79

Ethernet cabling ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-81

Ethernet standards and cable lengths ................................................................................................................. 2-81

Outdoor Cat5e cable ................................................................................................................................................... 2-81

Surge suppression unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-83

Gigabit Ethernet surge suppressor ...................................................................................................................... 2-83

cnPulse sync generator ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-85

Chapter 3: System Planning................................................................................................... 3-1

Radio spectrum planning .....................................................................................................................................................3-2

General wireless specifications .................................................................................................................................3-2

Regulatory limits ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-3

Conforming to the limits ............................................................................................................................................. 3-3

Available spectrum........................................................................................................................................................ 3-4

Channel bandwidth ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-4

Link planning..............................................................................................................................................................................3-5

Range and obstacles .....................................................................................................................................................3-5

Path loss ..............................................................................................................................................................................3-5

Adaptive modulation .................................................................................................................................................... 3-6

Data network planning ..........................................................................................................................................................3-7

Ethernet interfaces .........................................................................................................................................................3-7

Management VLAN ........................................................................................................................................................3-7

Quality of service for bridged Ethernet traffic .................................................................................................. 3-8

Chapter 4: Using the Device Management Interface ....................................................... 4-1

Preparing for configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 4-2

Safety precautions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

Regulatory compliance ................................................................................................................................................ 4-2

Connecting to the unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-3

Configuring the management PC............................................................................................................................ 4-3

Connecting to the PC and powering up .............................................................................................................. 4-4

Using the web interface ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-5

Logging into the web interface ............................................................................................................................... 4-5

Using the installation wizard – Access Point .............................................................................................................. 4-7

Installation wizard step 1 – Main system parameters ...................................................................................... 4-7

Installation wizard step 2 – Radio parameters .................................................................................................. 4-8

Installation wizard step 3 – Network parameters ............................................................................................ 4-9

PAGE 6
 Installation wizard step 4 – Security parameters ........................................................................................... 4-10

Using the installation wizard – Subscriber Module.................................................................................................. 4-12

Installation wizard step 1 – Main system parameters ..................................................................................... 4-12

Installation wizard step 2 – Radio parameters ................................................................................................. 4-13

Installation wizard step 3 – Network parameters ...........................................................................................4-14

Installation wizard step 4 – Security parameters ............................................................................................ 4-15

Using the menu options ......................................................................................................................................................4-16

Status page ...................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17

Installation page .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-20

Configuration menu ................................................................................................................................................... 4-20

Monitor menu ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-60

Tools menu ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-78

Chapter 5: Operation and Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 5-1

General Planning for troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................5-2

Upgrading device software .................................................................................................................................................5-3

Testing hardware .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-4

Checking the power supply LED ............................................................................................................................. 5-4

Power LED is off ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-4

Ethernet LED is off ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-4

Troubleshooting the radio link ...........................................................................................................................................5-7

The module has lost or does not establish radio connectivity ....................................................................5-7

Module exhibiting frequent boots or disconnects ........................................................................................... 5-8

Link is unreliable or does not achieve the data rates required .................................................................. 5-8

Resetting ePMP to factory defaults by power cycling ........................................................................................... 5-9

Chapter 6: Legal and Reference Information .................................................................... 6-1

Cambium Networks end user license agreement ..................................................................................................... 6-2

Acceptance of this agreement ................................................................................................................................. 6-2

Definitions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

Grant of license ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

Conditions of use ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-2

Title and restrictions ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-3

Confidentiality ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-4

Right to use Cambium’s name.................................................................................................................................. 6-4

Transfer .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-4

Updates .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-4

PAGE 7
 Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-4

Disclaimer .......................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

Limitation of liability ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

U.S. government ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-5

Term of license ................................................................................................................................................................ 6-6

Governing law .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-6

Assignment ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

Survival of provisions ................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

Entire agreement............................................................................................................................................................ 6-6

Third-party software ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

Source Code Requests ................................................................................................................................................ 6-7

Hardware warranty....................................................................................................................................................... 6-61

Limit of liability............................................................................................................................................................... 6-61

System threshold, output power and link loss ................................................................................................. 6-61

Compliance with safety standards ................................................................................................................................ 6-62

Electrical safety compliance.................................................................................................................................... 6-62

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance........................................................................................ 6-62

Human exposure to radio frequency energy ...................................................................................................6-63

Compliance with radio regulations ............................................................................................................................... 6-73

Type approvals.............................................................................................................................................................. 6-73

FCC and ETSI compliance testing ........................................................................................................................6-74

Notifications ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-76

5.1 GHz regulatory compliance ............................................................................................................................... 6-76

5.8 GHz regulatory compliance.............................................................................................................................. 6-79

Radio specifications ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-82

Product specifications ............................................................................................................................................... 6-82

Glossary..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-83

PAGE 8
This section describes important safety and regulatory guidelines that must be observed by personnel
installing or operating ePMP equipment.

To prevent loss of life or physical injury, observe the safety guidelines in this section.

Exercise extreme care when working near power lines.

Exercise extreme care when working at heights.

ePMP devices and mounting structures must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the
user’s responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations. In the USA, follow
Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 (USA). In Canada, follow Section 54
of the Canadian Electrical Code. These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the
outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire, and discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, and connection
requirements for grounding electrodes. Other regulations may apply in different countries and therefore
it is recommended that installation be contracted to a professional installer.

Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing.

The ePMP power supply is the primary disconnect device.

Safety may be compromised if outdoor-rated cables are not used for connections that will be exposed
to the outdoor environment.

Strong radio frequency (RF) fields will be present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on.
Always turn off the power to the ePMP device before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the
antenna.

Install the ePMP device to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons.

PAGE 9
The minimum separation distances for each frequency variant are specified in Calculated distances and
power compliance margins on page 6-64.

The ePMP product is certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is not allowed to
cause interference to licensed services (called primary users of the bands).

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

In countries where radar systems are the primary band users, the regulators have mandated special
requirements to protect these systems from interference caused by unlicensed devices. Unlicensed
devices must detect and avoid co-channel operation with radar systems.

The ePMP provides detect and avoid functionality for countries and frequency bands requiring
protection for radar systems.

Installers and users must meet all local regulatory requirements for radar detection. To meet these
requirements, users must set the correct country code during the commissioning of the ePMP
equipment. If this is not done, installers and users may be liable to civil and criminal penalties.

Contact the Cambium helpdesk if more guidance is required.

To ensure that the ePMP is installed and configured in compliance with the requirements of Industry
Canada and the FCC, installers must have the radio engineering skills and training described in this
section. This is particularly important when installing and configuring an ePMP system for operation in
the 5 GHz band (5150 – 5250 MHz – FCC only, 5250 – 5350 MHz, 5470 – 5725 MHz, and 5725 – 5850
MHz).

The installer must have the ability to configure IP addressing on a PC and to set up and control products
using a web browser interface.

To protect outdoor radio installations from the impact of lightning strikes, the installer must be familiar
with the normal procedures for site selection, bonding, and grounding. Installation guidelines for the
ePMP can be found in the section Site planning on page 2-2.

The installer needs to have basic competence in radio and IP network installation. The specific
requirements applicable to the ePMP must be gained by reading this user guide and by performing
sample setups at a base workshop before performing live installations.

PAGE 10
About This User Guide

This guide describes the planning, installation, configuration, and operation of the Cambium ePMP Series
of point-to-multipoint and point-to-point wireless Ethernet systems. It is intended for use by the system
designer, system installer, and system administrator.

For radio network design, see:

• Product description

• System hardware

• Site planning

• Legal and reference information

For system configuration, monitoring, and fault finding, see:

• Using the Device Management Interface

• Operation and Troubleshooting

PAGE 11
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION GENERAL INFORMATION

Support website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support

Main website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com

Sales enquiries: [email protected]

Address: Cambium Networks Limited

Unit B2, Linhay Business Park, Eastern Road
Ashburton, United Kingdom, TQ13 7UP

Cambium Networks ePMP documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation,
installation, and maintenance of the Cambium ePMP equipment and ancillary devices. It is
recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained.

Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or expressed, for any risk of damage, loss, or
reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or
anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters, or
recommendations made in this document.

References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross-references, emphasized in blue text
in electronic versions, are active links to the references.

This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are not
numbered but are individually named at the top of each page and are listed in the table of contents.

We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the structure,
content, accuracy, or completeness of our documents. Send feedback to
[email protected].

PAGE 12
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PROBLEMS AND WARRANTY

At Cambium Networks, we know what it takes to keep a growing network running optimally. We
provide multiple layers of support including training, online documentation, technical support,
information-sharing with an experienced community of users, software downloads, warranty services,
and repair.

Through the Cambium Support Center portal at https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/ you can:

• Submit support requests

• Submit RMA Request

• View support global contact numbers

Additional information including field service bulletins, license key information, warranty details, security
advisories, Cambium Care program descriptions, regional codes for PTP solutions, and compliance
requirements can be viewed at https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/.

If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process from the
support website.

For products shipped after October 1st, 2018 Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for three (3)
years from the date of shipment from Cambium or a Cambium distributor. Cambium warrants that
hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own
option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective
product. Repaired or replaced products will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than
thirty (30) days.

To register ePMP products or activate warranties, visit the support website.

For warranty assistance, contact the reseller or distributor.

Do not open the radio housing for repair or diagnostics; there are no serviceable parts
within the housing.

Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic

discharge. Use precautions to prevent damage.

PAGE 13
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SECURITY ADVICE

Cambium Networks’ systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the
operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium recommends setting and using
these parameters following industry-recognized security practices. Security aspects to be considered
are protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the
ability to communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about the
parties involved.

In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices, however,
the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies
with the operator of the system.

Cambium Networks ePMP equipment is shipped with default web management interface login
credentials. It is highly recommended that these usernames and passwords are modified before system
installation.

PAGE 14
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

The following describes how precautionary statements are used in this document.

Precautionary statements with the Warning tag precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous
situations. Warnings are used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or
physical injury. A warning has the following format:

text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.

Precautionary statements with the Attention tag precede instructions that are used when there is a
possibility of damage to systems, software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However,
this damage presents no danger to personnel. An attention statement has the following format:

text and consequence for not following the instructions.

Precautionary statements with the Note tag indicate the possibility of an undesirable situation or
provide additional information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the
following format:

text.

PAGE 15
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CARING FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of Cambium
Networks supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging.

The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European
Union (EU) directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using
Cambium equipment in EU countries.

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Do not dispose of Cambium equipment in landfill sites. For disposal instructions, see
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com

Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipient’s
responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.

In non-EU countries, dispose of Cambium equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance with
national and regional regulations.

PAGE 16
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CARING FOR THE ENVIRONMENT

Chapter 1: Product Description

This chapter provides a high-level description of the ePMP product. It describes the function of the
product, the main product variants, and the typical installation. It also describes the main hardware
components.

The following topics are described in this chapter:

• The key features, typical uses, product variants, and components of the ePMP are explained in the
Overview of ePMP on page 1-2.
• How the ePMP wireless link is operated, including modulation modes, power control, and security is
described under Wireless operation on page 1-13.
• The ePMP management system, including the web interface, installation, configuration, alerts, and
upgrades is described in System management on page 1-17.

PAGE 1-1
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

This section introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants, and components of the ePMP
portfolio as a whole (802.11n and 802.11ac products).

Cambium ePMP Series products are designed for Ethernet bridging over point-to-multipoint and point-
to-point microwave links in the unlicensed 2.4 GHz, 2.5 GHz (Brazil only), and 5 GHz bands. Users must
ensure that the ePMP Series complies with local operating regulations.

ePMP devices support point-to-point microwave links in the unlicensed 5 GHz band.

The ePMP Series acts as a transparent bridge between two segments of the operator and customers’
networks. In this sense, it can be treated as a virtual wired connection between the Access Point and the
Subscriber Module. The ePMP Series forwards 802.3 Ethernet packets destined for the other part of the
network and filters packets it does not need to forward and can deliver unicast data to unknown
destinations as broadcast, similar to a Switch functionality.

ePMP 3000 is a rugged high-capacity outdoor point-to-multipoint or point-

to-point link wireless device in the unlicensed 5 GHz frequency bands with a
maximum UDP sector throughput of up to 1+ Gbps (when operating with 80
MHz channel bandwidth).

• It is capable of operating in line-of-sight (LOS) and near-LOS

conditions and supports Quality of Service (QOS) for traffic
prioritization.

• It is available as a connectorized unit for use with a separate 4x4 MU-

MIMO Sector/Dual-Horn/Omni antenna and optional Smart Antenna
(for uplink beam steering).

• ePMP 3000 supports maximum information rate (MIR) further

allowing the operator to manage traffic profiles for end customers.

• ePMP 3000 provides Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for North

America (FCC) and supports additional DFS tuning balances
detection of actual DFS signals vs false detection.

• ePMP 3000 supports backward and forward compatibility with ePMP

802.11n devices to provide an immediate sector upgrade to 802.11ac
Wave 2 performance, and also to support future upgrades of
networks operating ePMP 1000/2000 Access Points.

• ePMP 3000 is based on highly integrated wireless semiconductor

components designed to meet the IEEE 802.11ac standard, however, the ePMP 3000 device has
a proprietary air interface for the main point-to-multipoint or point-to-point link.

PAGE 1-2
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

• ePMP 3000 is powered by standard power-over-Ethernet to a 1000Base-T port.

• Management of the unit is conducted via the same interface as the bridged traffic (in-band
Management).

A summary of the main ePMP 3000 characteristics is listed under Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 Main characteristics of the ePMP 3000 Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP or PTP

Wireless link condition LOS, near LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 10 MHz*, 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 1+ Gbps Sector Throughput

* The 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth is only supported with Force 300-19R SM.

The ePMP 3000L is the third-generation access point (AP) that carries on
the interference tolerance mechanisms with an emphasis on high-
performance in low-density point to multipoint sectors. The ePMP 3000L is a
2X2 MIMO connectorized access point that can support a wide variety of
deployments including 90/120-degree sectors, narrow-sector horns, or even
360-degree Omni coverage.

Also, the ePMP 3000L continues interference mitigation techniques with the
support of TDD synchronization using GPS and the robust software from the
ePMP product line. The ePMP 3000L system consists of the ePMP 3000L AP,
an optional 2X2 sector antenna, and a wide variety of subscriber modules
with varying form factors and link budgets.

ePMP 3000 supports backward and forward compatibility with ePMP 802.11n
devices to provide an immediate sector upgrade to 802.11ac Wave 2
performance, and also to support future upgrades of networks operating
ePMP 1000/2000 Access Points.

The ePMP 3000L system boasts a high packet per second performance,
peak throughput of 600 Mbps, and supports subscriber modules with up to
600 Mbps of peak throughput.

A summary of the main ePMP 3000L characteristics are listed under Table 1-2.

PAGE 1-3
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

Table 1-2 Main characteristics of the ePMP 3000L Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP or PTP

Wireless link condition LOS, near LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 1+ Gbps Sector Throughput

Force 300-25 is a rugged high-capacity outdoor point-to-multipoint or

point-to-point link wireless device in the unlicensed 5 GHz frequency
bands with a maximum UDP throughput of 500+ Mbps (when operating
with 80 MHz channel bandwidth). It is capable of operating in line-of-
sight (LOS) and near-LOS conditions. Force 300-25 is available as an
integrated unit with a dual-polarized 25 dBi narrow Beamwidth dish
antenna.

Force 300-25 is based on highly integrated wireless semiconductor

components designed to meet the IEEE 802.11ac standard, however, the
Force 300-25 device has a proprietary air interface for the main point-
to-point link.

Force 300-25 is powered by standard power-over-Ethernet to a

1000Base-T port.

Management of the unit is conducted via the same interface as the

bridged traffic (in-band Management).

A summary of the main Force 300-25 characteristics are listed under

Table 1-3.

PAGE 1-4
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

Table 1-3 Main characteristics of the Force 300-25 Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP, PTP

Wireless link condition LOS, near LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 500+ Mbps

*Force 300-19 is rugged high-capacity outdoor point-to-

multipoint or point-to-point link wireless devices in the
unlicensed 5 GHz frequency bands with a maximum UDP
throughput of 500+ Mbps (when operating with 80 MHz
channel bandwidth). The Force 300-19 is *IP55 rated
capable of operating in line-of-sight (LOS) and near-LOS
conditions.

Management of the unit is conducted via the same

interface as the bridged traffic (in-band Management).

A summary of the main Force 300-19(R) characteristics are

listed under Table 1-4 Main characteristics of the Force
300-19(R) Series

This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368 edition 2 specification, and the
radio housings are designed to be raintight.

PAGE 1-5
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

Table 1-4 Main characteristics of the Force 300-19(R) Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP, PTP

Wireless link condition LOS, near LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 500+ Mbps

Force 300-19R is a rugged high-capacity

outdoor point-to-multipoint or point-to-point
link wireless device in the unlicensed 5 GHz
frequency bands with a maximum UDP
throughput of 600+ Mbps (when operating
with 80 MHz channel bandwidth). The Force
300-19R is *IP67 rated capable of operating in
line-of-sight (LOS) and near-LOS conditions.
Force 300-19R is available as an integrated
unit with a dual-polarized 19dBi integrated
flat-panel antenna.

Force 300-19R is based on highly integrated

wireless semiconductor components
designed to meet the IEEE 802.11ac standard,
however, the Force 300-19R device has a
proprietary air interface for the main point-to-
point link.

Force 300-19R is powered by standard

power-over-Ethernet to a 1000Base-T port.

Management of the unit is conducted via the same interface as the bridged traffic (in-band
Management).

A summary of the main Force 300-19R characteristics is listed under Table 1-5 Main characteristics of
the Force 300-19R Series.

PAGE 1-6
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368 edition 2 specification, and the
radio housings are designed to be raintight.

Table 1-5 Main characteristics of the Force 300-19R Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP, PTP

Wireless link condition LOS, near LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 10/20/40/80 MHz

Data rate Up to 500+ Mbps

Environmental IP67

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are
designed to be raintight.

Temperature -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to 140°F)

Force 300-16 is a rugged high-capacity outdoor point-to-

multipoint or point-to-point link wireless device in the
unlicensed 5 GHz frequency bands with a maximum UDP
throughput of 500+ Mbps (when operating with 80 MHz
channel bandwidth). It is capable of operating in line-of-
sight (LOS) and near-LOS conditions. Force 300-16 is
available as an integrated unit with a dual-polarized 16
dBi integrated antenna.

Force 300-16 is based on highly integrated wireless

semiconductor components designed to meet the IEEE
802.11ac standard, however, the Force 300-16 device has
a proprietary air interface for the main point-to-point link.

Force 300-16 is powered by standard power-over-

Ethernet to a 1000Base-T port.

Management of the unit is conducted via the same interface as the bridged traffic (in-band
Management).

A summary of the main Force 300-16 characteristics is listed under Table 1-6.

PAGE 1-7
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

Table 1-6 Main characteristics of the Force 300-16 Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP, PTP

Wireless link condition LOS, near LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 500+ Mbps

Force 300-13 is a rugged high-capacity outdoor point-to-

multipoint or point-to-point link wireless device in the
unlicensed 5 GHz frequency bands with a maximum UDP
throughput of 500+ Mbps (when operating with 80 MHz
channel bandwidth). It can operate in line-of-sight (LOS).
Force 300-13 is available as an integrated unit with a dual-
polarized 13dBi flat-panel antenna.

Force 300-13 is based on highly integrated wireless

semiconductor components designed to meet the IEEE
802.11ac standard, however, the Force 300-13 device has a
proprietary air interface for the main point-to-point link.

Force 300-13 is powered by standard power-over-Ethernet to

a 1000Base-T port.

Management of the unit is conducted via the same interface

as the bridged traffic (in-band Management).

A summary of the main Force 300-13 characteristics are listed

under Table 1-7.

PAGE 1-8
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

Table 1-7 Main characteristics of the Force 300-13 Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP, PTP

Wireless link condition LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 500+ Mbps

The Force 300-13L is an affordable subscriber module in the ePMP Force

300 series. The Force 300-13L uses 802.11ac technology and supports MU-
MIMO and other features offered by the ePMP 3000 and ePMP 3000L
Access Points. It is also backward compatible with the ePMP 2000 using
backward compatibility features. The Force 300-13L is powered by standard
power-over-Ethernet to a 1000Base-T port.

Note: The ePMP Force 300-13L is available in EMEA, CALA, and APAC
regions where type approved. It is NOT available in North America.

A summary of the main Force 300-13L characteristics is listed under Table

1-8.

PAGE 1-9
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

Table 1-8 Main characteristics of the Force 300-13L Series

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP, PTP

Wireless link condition LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 400+ Mbps

Force 300 CSM is an *IP67 rugged high-capacity outdoor

point-to-multipoint or point-to-point link wireless device in
the unlicensed 5 GHz frequency bands with a maximum UDP
throughput of 600+ Mbps (when operating with 80 MHz
channel bandwidth). It can operate in line-of-sight (LOS).
Force 300 CMS is a Connectorized device with support for RF
Element Twistport™ adaptors.

The Force 300 CSM device is based on highly integrated

wireless semiconductor components designed to meet the
IEEE 802.11ac standard.

Management of the unit is conducted via the same interface

as the bridged traffic (in-band Management).

A summary of the main Force 300 CSM characteristics are

listed under Table 1-9.

This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368 edition 2 specification, and the
radio housings are designed to be raintight.

PAGE 1-10
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

Table 1-9 Main characteristics of the Force 300 CSM

Characteristic Value

Topology PMP, PTP

Wireless link condition LOS

Scheduler TDD

Connectivity Ethernet

Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz

Data rate Up to 600+ Mbps

The ePMP is a solution consisting of integrated outdoor units, indoor power supply units / LAN injectors,
cabling, and surge suppression equipment.

The main hardware components of an ePMP installation are as follows:

• ePMP 3000 Access Point: A connectorized outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio,
networking, and surge suppression electronics.
• ePMP 3000L Access Point: A connectorized *IP67 outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio,
networking, and surge suppression electronics.

• ePMP 3000/3000L Access Point Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-
over-Ethernet (PoE) supply and 1000 / 100 Base-TX to the Access Point.
• ePMP 3000/3000L Access Point Radio Cabling and Lightning Protection: Shielded Cat5e cables,
grounding cables, surge suppressors, and connectors.
• ePMP Smart Antenna and cabling (optional): For Smart Beamforming, dynamically creates a
narrow, targeted beam to each subscriber
• Force 300-25/Force 300-19/Force 300-19R/Force 300-16/Force 300-13/Force 300 CSM Radio:
Integrated outdoor transceiver units containing all the radio, networking, and surge suppression
electronics.
• Force 300-25/Force 300-19/Force 300-19R/Force 300-16/Force 300-13/Force 300 CSM Power
Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply and 100/1000
Base-T to the Force 300-25 device.
• Force 300-25/Force 300-19/Force 300-19R/Force 300-16/Force 300-13/Force 300 CSM Radio
Cabling and Lightning Protection: Shielded Cat5e cables, grounding cables, surge suppressors, and
connectors.
• ePMP 4x4 MU-MIMO Sector Antenna/ePMP 4x4 MU-MIMO Dual-Horn Antenna/ePMP 4x4 MU-MIMO
Omni Antenna: External Antennas for the ePMP 3000 Access Point.

PAGE 1-11
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OVERVIEW OF EPMP

For more information about these components, including interfaces, specifications, and Cambium part
numbers, see System Hardware on page 2-1.

This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368 edition 2 specification, and the
radio housings are designed to be raintight.

PAGE 1-12
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WIRELESS OPERATION

This section describes how the ePMP wireless link is operated, including modulation modes, power
control, and security.

The ePMP 3000 MU-MIMO access point is equipped with either a sector antenna array or a pseudo-
Omni antenna. Antenna diversity allows simultaneous DL transmissions for two subscriber modules for
MU-MIMO. As such, the ePMP 3000 access point’s DL throughput capacity is significantly increased vs.
the ePMP 1000/2000 access points.

This is a contrast to a traditional wireless system, where two subscribers cannot communicate on the
same channel to the same access point at the same time without causing significant self-interference
and degrading the overall wireless network performance.

The Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) technique protects against fading and increases the
probability of a received decoded signal being usable.

Powered by Hypure™ technology, ePMP series Access Points feature

Smart Beamforming. This powerful addition to your network creates
narrow, targeted beams to each subscriber, rather than relying on a
traditional wide beam, blocking out multiple sources of interference to
keep performance high.

The System learns the locations of each served Subscriber Module and
forms a narrow beam towards the desired Subscriber Module while that
radio is transmitting in the uplink. This reduces the gain on the uplink for
on-channel interferers that are transmitting at an azimuth angle different
than the Subscriber Module, delivering performance gains never seen
before.

PAGE 1-13
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WIRELESS OPERATION

• Eliminate Uplink Interference: Smart Beamforming delivers dramatic performance improvements

when dealing with strong co-channel uplink interference, maximizing network performance.
• Consistent Performance in High Interference: By mitigating significant sources of interference,
packet loss and retransmissions are kept to a minimum, keeping your network applications working
at their best.
• Improvement in Uplink and Downlink Performance: By eliminating packet loss and retransmissions
resulting from co-channel uplink interference, TCP retransmissions are greatly reduced. Other
applications also show significant performance benefits.
• Intelligent Filtering improves both receive and transmit performance. It protects the network from
off-channel interferers with a filter that dynamically moves around the channel. On the transmit side,
it protects the RF environment by reducing off-channel transmission noise.

ePMP links operate using Time Division Duplexing (TDD). The links employ a TDD cycle in which the
Access Point determines which Subscriber Modules may transmit and when based on the configured
downlink/uplink ratio (duty cycle). Three fixed Downlink/Uplink frame ratios are available – 75/25,
50/50, and 30/70.

ePMP 3000 transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). This wideband signal
consists of many equally spaced sub-carriers. Although each subcarrier is modulated at a low rate using
conventional modulation schemes, the resultant data rate from all the sub-carriers is high.

The channel bandwidth of the OFDM signal is 20 MHz, 40 MHz, or 80 MHz, based on operator
configuration.

Each channel is offset in center frequency from its neighboring channel by 5 MHz.

ePMP 3000 can transport data over the wireless link using several different modulation modes ranging
from 256-QAM to QPSK. For a given channel bandwidth and TDD frame structure, each modulation
mode transports data at a fixed rate. Also, the receiver requires a given signal-to-noise ratio to
successfully demodulate a given modulation mode. Although the more complex modulations such as
256-QAM will transport data at a much higher rate than the less complex modulation modes, the
receiver requires a much higher signal-to-noise ratio.

ePMP 3000 provides an adaptive modulation scheme where the receiver constantly monitors the
quality of the received signal and notifies the far end of the link of the optimum modulation mode with
which to transmit. In this way, optimum capacity is achieved at all times.

PAGE 1-14
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WIRELESS OPERATION

In regions where the protection of radars is part of the local regulations, ePMP must detect interference
from radar-like systems and avoid co-channel operation with these systems.

To meet this requirement, ePMP implements the following features:

• The equipment can only transmit on available channels, of which there are none at initial power-up.
The radar detection algorithm will always scan a usable channel for 60 seconds for radar
interference before making the channel an available channel.
• This compulsory channel scan will mean that there is at least 60 seconds service outage every time
radar is detected, and that the installation time is extended by at least 60 seconds even if there is
found to be no radar on the channel.
There is a secondary requirement for bands requiring radar avoidance. Regulators have mandated that
products provide a uniform loading of the spectrum across all devices. In general, this prevents
operation with fixed frequency allocations. However:

• ETSI regulations do allow frequency planning of networks (as that has the same effect of spreading
the load across the spectrum).
• The FCC does allow channels to be avoided if there is actual interference on them.

When operating in a region that requires DFS, ensure that the AP is configured with
alternate frequencies and that the SM is configured to scan for these frequencies to
avoid long outages.

ePMP supports optional encryption for data transmitted over the wireless link. The encryption algorithm
used is the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with a 128-bit key size. AES is a symmetric encryption
algorithm approved by U.S. Government organizations (and others) to protect sensitive information.

Some aspects of the wireless operation are controlled, enforced, or restricted according to a country
code. ePMP country codes represent individual countries (for example Denmark) or regulatory regions
(for example FCC or ETSI).

Country codes affect the following aspects of wireless operation:

• Maximum transmit power

• Radar avoidance (future release)
• Frequency range

PAGE 1-15
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION WIRELESS OPERATION

To avoid possible enforcement action by the country regulator, always operate links in
accordance with local regulations

For information on planning wireless operation, see:

• The regulatory restrictions that affect radio spectrum usages, such as frequency range and radar
avoidance are described under Radio spectrum planning on page 3-2.
• The factors to be taken into account when planning links such as range, path loss, and data
throughput are described under Link planning on page 3-5.
• The safety specifications against which the ePMP has been tested are listed under Compliance with
safety standards on page 6-61. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.
• How ePMP complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries is explained in
Compliance with radio regulations on page 6-73.
For more information on configuring and operating the wireless link, see:

• The configuration parameters of the ePMP devices are described under Using the menu options on
page 4-16.
• Post-installation procedures and troubleshooting tips are explained under Operation and
Troubleshooting on page 5-1.

PAGE 1-16
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

This section introduces the ePMP management system, including the web interface, installation, alerts,
and upgrades, configuration, and management software.

ePMP equipment is managed through an embedded management agent. Management workstations,

network management systems, or PCs can be connected to this agent using the module’s Ethernet port,
SFP port, over the air (Subscriber Module connection via Access Point), or by using the device WiFi
management interface.

The management agent supports the following interfaces:

• Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)

• Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPs)
• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
• Network Time Protocol (NTP)
• System logging (Syslog)
• cnMaestro™ Cloud-based or On-premises Management System
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

The ePMP management agent contains a web server. The web server supports access via the HTTP and
HTTPs interfaces.

Web-based management offers a convenient way to manage the ePMP equipment from a locally
connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through a management
network, without requiring any special management software. The web-based interfaces are the only
interfaces supported for the installation of ePMP, and the majority of ePMP configuration management
tasks.

PAGE 1-17
CHAPTER 1: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

When identity-based user accounts are configured, a security officer can define from one to four user
accounts, each of which may have one of the four possible roles:

• ADMINISTRATOR (default username/password “admin”), who has full read and write permission.
• INSTALLER (default username/password “installer”), who has permission to read and write
parameters applicable to unit installation and monitoring.
• HOME (default username/password “home”), who has permission only to access pertinent
information for support purposes
• READONLY (default username/password “readonly”), who has permission to only view the Monitor
page.

The management agent supports fault and performance management utilizing an SNMP interface. The
management agent is compatible with SNMP v2c using one Management Information Base (MIB) file
which is available for download from the Cambium Networks support site:
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp.

The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system. It can be set to run with or without
a connection to a network time server (NTP). It can be configured to display local time by setting the
time zone and daylight saving on the Time web page.

If an NTP server connection is available, the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at
regular intervals.

ePMP devices may receive NTP data from a CMM module or an NTP server configured in the system’s
management network.

The Time Zone option is configurable on the Configure > System page and may be used to offset the
received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone.

Software upgrades may be issued via the radio web interface (Tools > Software Upgrade) or cnMaestro
(cloud.cambiumnetworks.com). For software upgrades, see
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp.

For more information on system management, see

Operation and Troubleshooting on page 5-1

PAGE 1-18
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Chapter 2: System Hardware

This chapter describes the site planning and hardware components of an ePMP link.

The following topics are described in this chapter:

• Factors to be considered when planning the proposed network is described under Site planning on
page 2-2.
• The ePMP 3000 Access Point hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under ePMP 3000 Access Point on page 2-5.
• The Force 300-25 module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300-25 on page 2-18.
• The Force 300-19 module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300-19 on page 2-31.
• The Force 300-19 module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300-19 on page 2-31.
• The Force 300-19R module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300-19R on page 2-37.
• The Force 300-16 module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300-16 on page 2-43.
• The Force 300-13 module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300-13 on page 2-48.
• The Force 300-13L module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300-13L on page 2-53.
• The Force 300 CSM module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications are
described under Force 300 CSM on page 2-58.
• The ePMP MP 3000 MicroPOP module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and
specifications are described under ePMP MP3000 MicroPOP on page 2-63

• The Force 425 module hardware, integrated description, part numbers, mounting equipment, and
specifications are described under Force 425 on page 2-68

• The Force 400C module hardware, integrated description, part numbers, mounting equipment, and
specifications are described under Force 400C on page 2-73

• The power supply hardware, part numbers, and specifications are described under Power supply on
page 2-77.
• Cable standards and lengths are described under Ethernet cabling on page 2-81.
• Surge suppression requirements and recommendations are described under the Surge suppression
unit on page 2-83.

PAGE 2-1
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE SITE PLANNING

Conduct a site survey to ensure that the proposed sites meet the requirements defined in this section.

An ePMP site typically consists of a high supporting structure such as a mast, tower, or building for the
devices.

Find a location for the device that meets the following requirements:

• The equipment is high enough to achieve the best radio path.

• People can be kept a safe distance away from the equipment when it is radiating. The safe
separation distances are defined in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 6-
64.
• The equipment is lower than the top of the supporting structure (tower, mast, or building) or its
lightning air terminal.
• There is one Ethernet interface, a copper Cat5e connection from the device to the power supply,
and network terminating equipment.

Structures, equipment, and people must be protected against power surges (typically caused by
lightning) by conducting the surge current to the ground via a separate preferential solid path. The
actual degree of protection required depends on local conditions and applicable local regulations. To
adequately protect an ePMP installation, both ground bonding and transient voltage surge suppression
are required.

Electro-magnetic discharge (lightning) damage is not covered under warranty. The

recommendations in this guide, when followed correctly, give the user the best
protection from the harmful effects of EMD. However, 100% protection is neither
implied nor possible.

Details of lightning protection methods and requirements can be found in the international standards
IEC 61024-1 and IEC 61312-1, the U.S. National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984, or section 54 of
the Canadian Electric Code.

International and national standards take precedence over the requirements in this
guide.

PAGE 2-2
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE SITE PLANNING

Figure 1 Access Point installation diagram Figure 2 Subscriber / Point-to-Point

installation diagram

Use the rolling sphere method (Figure 3) to determine where it is safe to mount equipment. An
imaginary sphere, typically 50 meters in radius, is rolled over the structure. Where the sphere rests
against the ground and a strike termination device (such as a finial or ground bar), all the space under
the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection (Zone B). Similarly, where the sphere rests on
two finials, the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection.

PAGE 2-3
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE SITE PLANNING

Figure 3 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones

Assess locations on masts, towers, and buildings to determine if the location is in Zone A or Zone B:

• Zone A: In this zone a direct lightning strike is possible. Do not mount equipment in this zone.
• Zone B: In this zone, direct EMD (lightning) effects are still possible, but mounting in this zone
significantly reduces the possibility of a direct strike. Mount equipment in this zone.

Do not mount equipment in Zone A which can put the equipment, structures, and life at
risk.

PAGE 2-4
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000 ACCESS POINT

For details of the ePMP 3000 Access Point hardware, see:

• ePMP 3000 Access Point description on page 2-5

• ePMP 3000 Access Point part numbers on page 2-6

• ePMP 3000 Access Point mounting bracket on page 2-8

• ePMP 3000 Access Point interfaces on page 2-9

• ePMP 3000 Access Point specifications on page 2-9

• ePMP 3000 Access Point heater on page 2-10

• ePMP 3000 Access Point wind loading on page 2-10

• ePMP 3000 Access Point software packages on page 2-11

The ePMP 3000 Access Point is a self-contained

transceiver unit that houses both radio and
networking electronics.

It is available as a connectorized unit for use

with a separate 4x4 MU-MIMO Sector/Dual-
Horn/Omni antenna and an optional Smart
Antenna (for uplink beam steering).

Figure 4 ePMP 3000 Access Point

PAGE 2-5
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000 ACCESS POINT

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-1 and

PAGE 2-6
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000 ACCESS POINT

Table 2-2 includes the following items:

• One connectorized unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

Table 2-1 ePMP 3000 Access Point part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (FCC) (US cord) C058910A102A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (IC) (Canada/US cord) C050910A104A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (EU) (EU cord) C050910A203A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (EU) (UK cord) C050910A303A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (no cord) C050910A001A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (US cord) C050910A101A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (EU cord) C050910A201A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (UK cord) C050910A301A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (India cord) C050910A401A

ePMP 3000 5GHz Access Point Radio (India) (India Cord) C050910A402A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (China cord) C050910A501A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910A601A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910A701A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910A801A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910A901A

ePMP 3000 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (No PSU) C050910AZ01A

ePMP 4x4 MU-MIMO Sector Antenna (for ePMP3000AP) C050910D301A

ePMP 4x4 MU-MIMO Dual-Horn Antenna (for ePMP3000AP) C050900D025A

ePMP 4x4 MU-MIMO Omni Antenna (for ePMP3000AP)

• KP-5QSOMNI-13 (available directly from KP Performance)

PAGE 2-7
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000 ACCESS POINT

Table 2-2 ePMP 3000 accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

The ePMP 3000 Access Point module is

designed to be mounted with a sector antenna or
pole-mounted using the mounting bracket
provided in the box with the radio.

Figure 5 ePMP 3000 Access Point module

mounting bracket

PAGE 2-8
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000 ACCESS POINT

The Ethernet port is located at the bottom of the unit. This interface is described in Table 2-3 ePMP
3000 Series – rear interfaces

Table 2-3 ePMP 3000 Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
Eth RJ45
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

Optical or Copper Gigabit Management and/or data

SFP SFP
Ethernet

The ePMP 3000 connectorized module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-4 and Table 2-5.
The connectorized module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression
but does not provide lightning suppression.

Table 2-4 ePMP 3000 Access Point physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Length x Width x 22.2 cm x 12.4 cm x 4.5 cm (8.75 in x 4.9 in x 1.75 in) without
Height) brackets

Weight 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs) without brackets

Table 2-5 ePMP 3000 Access Point environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +55°C (131°F)

Wind loading 124 mph (200 kph) maximum. See ePMP 3000 Access Point
wind loading on page 2-10 for a full description.

Humidity 95% condensing

Environmental IP55

PAGE 2-9
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000 ACCESS POINT

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

At startup, if the ePMP 3000 Access Point module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal
heater is activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only
activated when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is
complete. When the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated and the unit
continues its startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-6 ePMP 3000 Access
Point startup times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-6 ePMP 3000 Access Point startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 200 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

PAGE 2-10
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000 ACCESS POINT

V wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-7 and Table 2-8.

Table 2-7 ePMP 3000 Access Point wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

device surface area
40 50 60
(square meters)

ePMP 3000 Access 0.13 21.74 Kg 33.96 Kg 48.91 Kg

Point with Sector
Antenna

Table 2-8 ePMP 3000 Access Point wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

ePMP 3000 Access 1.4 37.63 lb 58.80 lb 84.67 lb

Point with Sector
Antenna

ePMP 3000 Access Point devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the
Cambium Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP
integrated radios are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-11
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000L ACCESS POINT

For details of the ePMP 3000L Access Point hardware, see:

• ePMP 3000L Access Point description on page 2-12

• ePMP 3000L Access Point part numbers on page 2-13

• ePMP 3000L Access Point mounting bracket on page 2-14

• ePMP 3000L Access Point interfaces on page 2-15

• ePMP 3000L Access Point specifications on page 2-15

• ePMP 3000L Access Point heater on page 2-16

• ePMP 3000L Access Point wind loading on page 2-16

• ePMP 3000L Access Point software packages on page 2-17

The ePMP 3000L device is a self-contained

transceiver unit that houses both radio and
networking electronics.

Figure 6 ePMP 3000L Access Point

PAGE 2-12
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000L ACCESS POINT

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-9 ePMP 3000L Access Point part numbersand Table 2-10 includes the
following items:

• One connectorized unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

Table 2-9 ePMP 3000L Access Point part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (FCC) (US cord) C058910A122A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (IC) (Canada/US cord) C050910A124A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (EU) (EU cord) C050910A223A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (EU) (UK cord) C050910A323A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (no cord) C050910A021A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (US cord) C050910A121A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (EU cord) C050910A221A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (UK cord) C050910A321A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (India cord) C050910A421A

ePMP 3000L 5GHz Access Point Radio (India) (India Cord) C050910A422A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (China cord) C050910A521A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910A621A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910A721A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910A821A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910A921A

ePMP 3000L 5 GHz Access Point Radio (ROW) (No PSU) C050910AZ21A

Table 2-10 ePMP 3000L accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

PAGE 2-13
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000L ACCESS POINT

Cambium description Cambium part number

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

The ePMP 3000L Access Point module is

designed to be mounted with a sector antenna or
pole-mounted using the mounting bracket
provided in the box with the radio.

Figure 7 ePMP 3000L Access Point module

mounting bracket

PAGE 2-14
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000L ACCESS POINT

The Ethernet port is located at the bottom of the unit. This interface is described in Table 2-11 ePMP
3000 Series – rear interfaces

Table 2-11 ePMP 3000 Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
Eth RJ45
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

Optical or Copper Gigabit Management and/or data

SFP SFP
Ethernet

The ePMP 3000L connectorized module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-12 and Table 2-
13.
The connectorized module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression
but does not provide lightning suppression.

Table 2-12 ePMP 3000L Access Point physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Length x Width x 22.2 cm x 12.4 cm x 4.5 cm (8.75 in x 4.9 in x 1.75 in) without
Height) brackets

Weight 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs) without brackets

Table 2-13 ePMP 3000L Access Point environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +55°C (131°F)

Wind loading 124 mph (200 kph) maximum. See ePMP 3000 Access Point
wind loading (Kg) on page 2-16 for a full description.

Humidity 95% condensing

Environmental IP67

PAGE 2-15
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000L ACCESS POINT

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

At startup, if the ePMP 3000L Access Point module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal
heater is activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only
activated when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is
complete. When the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit
continues its startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-14 ePMP 3000L Access
Point startup times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-14 ePMP 3000L Access Point startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 200 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

PAGE 2-16
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP 3000L ACCESS POINT

V wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-15 ePMP 3000L Access Point wind loading (Kg)and Table 2-16 ePMP 3000L Access
Point wind loading (lb)

Table 2-15 ePMP 3000L Access Point wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

device surface area
40 50 60
(square meters)

ePMP 3000L 0.13 21.74 Kg 33.96 Kg 48.91 Kg

Access Point with
Sector Antenna

Table 2-16 ePMP 3000L Access Point wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

ePMP 3000L Access 1.4 37.63 lb 58.80 lb 84.67 lb

Point with Sector
Antenna

ePMP 3000L Access Point devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the
Cambium Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP
integrated radios are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-17
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25

For details of the Force 300-25 hardware, see:

• Force 300-25 integrated description on page 2-18

• Force 300-25 part numbers on page 2-19

• Force 300-25 mounting bracket on page 2-20

• Force 300-25 interfaces on page 2-20

• Force 300-25 specifications on page 2-21

• Force 300-25 heater on page 2-21

• Force 300-25 wind loading on page 2-22

• Force 300-25 software packages on page 2-23

The Force 300-25 device is a self-contained

transceiver unit that houses both radio and
networking electronics.

Figure 8 Force 300-25 Integrated

PAGE 2-18
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-17 Force 300-25 part numbersand Table 2-18 Force 300-25 accessory
part numbersincludes the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

Table 2-17 Force 300-25 part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (FCC) (US Cord) C058910C102A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (IC) (Canada/US Cord) C050910C104A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (EU) (EU Cord) C050910C203A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (EU) (UK Cord) C050910C303A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (no Cord) C050910C001A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (US Cord) C050910C101A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (EU Cord) C050910C201A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (UK Cord) C050910C301A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (India Cord) C050910C401A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (China Cord) C050910C501A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (Brazil Cord) C050910C601A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (Argentina Cord) C050910C701A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (ANZ Cord) C050910C801A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (South Africa Cord) C050910C901A

ePMP Force 300-25-25 5 GHz High Gain Radio (RoW) (No PSU) C050910CZ01A

Table 2-18 Force 300-25 accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

PAGE 2-19
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25

Cambium description Cambium part number

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

The Force 300-25 module is designed to be

pole-mounted using the mounting bracket
provided in the box with the radio.

Figure 9 Force 300-25 module mounting bracket

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit. This interface is described in Table 2-19
Force 300-25 Series – rear interfaces

Table 2-19 Force 300-25 Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
Eth RJ45
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

PAGE 2-20
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25

The Force 300-25 integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-20 Force 300-25
physical specificationsand Table 2-21 Force 300-25 environmental specifications

The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

Table 2-20 Force 300-25 physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 47 cm x 31 cm (18.5 in x 12.2 in)

Weight 2.4 kg (5.2 lbs)

Table 2-21 Force 300-25 environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +55°C (131°F)

Wind loading 124 mph (200 kph) maximum. See Force 300-25 wind loading
on page 2-22 for a full description.

Humidity 95% condensing

Environmental IP55

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

At startup, if the Force 300-25 module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in

PAGE 2-21
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25

Table 2-22 Force 300-25 startup times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-22 Force 300-25 startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 200 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-23 and

Table 2-24.

PAGE 2-22
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25

.Table 2-23 Force 300-25 wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

device surface area
40 50 60
(square meters)

Force 300-25 0.15 25.08 Kg 39.2 Kg 56.43 Kg

Integrated

Table 2-24 Force 300-25 wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

Force 300-25 1.61 43.28 67.62 lb 97.37 lb

Integrated lb

Force 300-25 devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-23
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25

PAGE 2-24
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25L

For details of the Force 300-25L hardware, see:

• Force 300 CSM Connectorized Subscriber Module description on page 2-25

• Force 300-25L key features on page 2-25

• Force 300-25L part numbers on page 2-26

• Force 300-25L interfaces on page 2-28

• Force 300-25L specificationson page 2-28

• Force 300-25L heater on page 2-29

• Force 300-25L wind loading on page 2-29

• Force 300-25L software packages on page 2-30

The Force 300-25L is an integrated 802.11ac Wave2 based

Subscriber Module with an integrated 25 dBi dish.

The radio supports PTP and ePTP protocols and is

compatible with PMP applications with ePMP 3000, ePMP
3000L, and ePMP 2000 Access Points.

• Supports up to 400 Mbps usable throughput

• Frequency Range from 4.9 to 6.4 GHz

• Up to 26 dBm Tx Power

• Network management: HTTPS, SNMPv2c, SSH,

cnMaestro

• Channel Size: 20 / 40 / 80 MHz

Figure 10 Force 300-25L

PAGE 2-25
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25L

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-79 ePMP MP 3000 part numbersand Table 2-26 includes the following
items:

• One unit

• One Dish

• One Fixed Mounting Bracket

• One unit

• Two Hose Clamps

• One PoE injector

• One Line Cord

An Optional Tilt Mount Bracket is available separately (N000900L063A).

Table 2-25 Force 300-25L part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (no cord) C050910M071A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (US cord) C050910M171A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (EU cord) C050910M271A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (EU) (EU cord) C050910M273A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (UK cord) C050910M371A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (EU) (UK cord) C050910M373A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (India cord) C050910M471A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (India) (India Cord) C050910M472A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (China cord) C050910M571A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910M671A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910M771A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910M871A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910CM71A

PAGE 2-26
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25L

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (No PSU) C050910MZ71A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (no cord) C050910C071A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (US cord) C050910C171A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (EU cord) C050910C271A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (EU) (EU cord) C050910C273A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (UK cord) C050910C371A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (EU) (UK cord) C050910C373A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (India cord) C050910C471A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (India) (India Cord) C050910C472A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (China cord) C050910C571A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910C671A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910C771A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910C871A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910C971A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-25L SM Bulk Packaging (ROW) (No PSU) C050910CZ71A

Table 2-26 Force 300-25L accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

PAGE 2-27
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25L

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the unit.

Table 2-27 Force 300-25L – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Eth RJ45
100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

The Force 300-25L integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-82 ePMP MP
3000 physical specificationsand Table 2-83 ePMP MP 3000 environmental specificationsThe integrated
module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not provide lightning
suppression.

Table 2-28 Force 300-25L physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) TBDmm x TBDmm x TBDmm (TBDin x TBDin x TBDin)

Weight TBD

Antenna Integrated dish, 25 dBi,

Pole Diameter Range 3.8 cm – 6.4 cm (1.5 in – 2.5 in)

Power Consumption 12 W Maximum, 9 W Typical

Input Voltage 30 V Passive PoE (14-30V DC input)

Table 2-29 Force 300-25L environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +122°F) ambient op temp

Wind Survival 200 km/hour (124 mi/hour)

Environmental IP55

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

PAGE 2-28
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25L

At startup, if the Force 300-25L module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-30 Force 300-25L
startup times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-30 Force 300-25L startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-85 and Table 2-32.

PAGE 2-29
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-25L

Table 2-31 Force 300-25L wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per

device surface area second)
(square meters)
30 40 50

Force 300-25L 0.03 2.82 Kg 5.02 Kg 7.84 Kg

Integrated

Table 2-32 Force 300-25L wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

Force 300-25L 0.28 7.53 lb 11.76 lb 16.93 lb

Force 300-25L devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-30
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19

For details of the Force 300-19 hardware, see:

• Force 300-19 integrated description on page 2-31

• Force 300-19 part numbers on page 2-31

• Force 300-19 mounting bracket on page 2-33

• Force 300-19 interfaces on page 2-33

• Force 300-19 specifications on page 2-33

• Force 300-19 heater on page 2-34

• Force 300-19 wind loading on page 2-35

• Force 300-19 software packages on page 2-36

The Force 300-19 device is a self-contained transceiver

unit that houses both radio and networking electronics.
(FCCID:Z8H89FT0048 | IC:109W-0048)

Figure 11 Force 300-19 Access Point

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-33 Force 300-19 part numbersand Table 2-34 Force 300-19 accessory
part numbers include the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

PAGE 2-31
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19

Table 2-33 Force 300-19 part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (FCC) (US cord) C058900C801A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (IC) (Canada/US cord) C050900C801A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (EU) (EU cord) C050900C802A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (EU) (UK cord) C050900C803A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (no cord) C050900C804A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (US cord) C050900C805A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (EU cord) C050900C806A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (UK cord) C050900C807A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (India cord) C050900C808A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (India) (India cord) C050900C809A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (China cord) C050900C810A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050900C811A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050900C812A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050900C813A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050900C814A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19 SM (ROW) (No PSU) C050900C815A

Table 2-34 Force 300-19 accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

PAGE 2-32
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19

The Force 300-19 module is designed to be

pole-mounted using the mounting bracket
provided in the box with the radio.

Figure 12 Force 300-19 module mounting bracket

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit. This interface is described in Table 2-35
Force 300-19 Series – rear interfaces

Table 2-35 Force 300-19 Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

The Force 300-19 integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-36 Force 300-19
physical specificationsand Table 2-37 Force 300-19 environmental specifications
The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

PAGE 2-33
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19

Table 2-36 Force 300-19 physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions 27.8 cm x 27.8 cm x 4.5cm (10.9 in x 10.9 in x 1.8 in)

Weight 1.45 kg (3.2 lbs) (Including mounting bracket)

Antenna Gain 19 dBi

Table 2-37 Force 300-19 environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +60°C (140°F)

Wind loading 113 mph (180 kph) maximum. See Force 300-19 wind loading
on page 2-33 for a full description.

Humidity 95% condensing

Environmental IP55

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

At startup, if the Force 300-19 module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-38 Force 300-19 startup
times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-38 Force 300-19 startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

PAGE 2-34
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph
(113 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-39 Force 300-19 wind loading (Kg)and Table 2-40.

Table 2-39 Force 300-19 wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

device surface area
40 50 60
(square meters)

Force 300-19 0.08 13.4Kg 20.9Kg 30.1Kg

Integrated

Table 2-40 Force 300-19 wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

Force 300-19 0.8281 22.3 lb 34.8 lb 50.1 lb

Integrated

PAGE 2-35
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19

Force 300-19 devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-36
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19R

For details of the Force 300-19R hardware, see:

• Force 300-19R Integrated descriptionon page 2-37

• Force 300-19R part numbers on page 2-37

• Force 300-19R mounting bracket on page 2-39

• Force 300-19R interfaces on page 2-39

• Force 300-19R specifications on page 2-39

• Force 300-19R heater on page 2-40

• Force 300-19R wind loading on page 2-41

• Force 300-19R software packages on page 2-42

The Force 300-19R device is a self-contained transceiver unit

that houses both radio and networking electronics.
(FCCID: Z8H89FT0048 | IC:109W-0048)

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing

restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-41 and Table 2-42 include the
following items:

Figure 13 Force 300-19R

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

Table 2-41 Force 300-19R part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (FCC) (US cord) C058900C901A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (IC) (Canada/US cord) C050900C901A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (EU) (EU cord) C050900C902A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (EU) (UK cord) C050900C903A

PAGE 2-37
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19R

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (no cord) C050900C904A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (US cord) C050900C905A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (EU cord) C050900C906A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (UK cord) C050900C907A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (India cord) C050900C908A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (India) (India cord) C050900C909A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (China cord) C050900C910A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050900C911A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050900C912A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050900C913A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050900C914A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-19R SM (ROW) (No PSU) C050900C915A

Table 2-42 Force 300-19R accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

PAGE 2-38
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19R

The Force 300-19R module is designed to be

pole-mounted using the mounting bracket
provided in the box with the radio.

Figure 14 Force 300-19R module mounting

bracket

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit. This interface is described in Table 2-43
Force 300-19R Series – rear interfaces

Table 2-43 Force 300-19R Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

The Force 300-19R integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-44 Force 300-19R
physical specifications and Table 2-45 Force 300-19R environmental specifications
The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

PAGE 2-39
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19R

Table 2-44 Force 300-19R physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions 27.8 cm x 27.8 cm x 4.5cm (10.9 in x 10.9 in x 1.8 in)

Weight 1.45 kg (3.2 lbs) (Including mounting bracket)

Antenna Gain 19 dBi

Table 2-45 Force 300-19R environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +60°C (140°F)

Wind loading 113 mph (180 kph) maximum. See Force 300-19R wind loading
on page 2-41 for a full description.

Humidity 95% condensing

Environmental IP67

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

At startup, if the Force 300-19R module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-46 Force 300-19R
startup times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-46 Force 300-19R startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

PAGE 2-40
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19R

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph
(113 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-47 Force 300-19R wind loading (Kg)and Table 2-48 Force 300-19R wind loading (lb)

Table 2-47 Force 300-19R wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

device surface area
40 50 60
(square meters)

Force 300-19 0.08 13.4Kg 20.9Kg 30.1Kg

Integrated

Table 2-48 Force 300-19R wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

Force 300-19 0.8281 22.3 lb 34.8 lb 50.1 lb

Integrated

PAGE 2-41
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-19R

Force 300-19R devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-42
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-16

For details of the Force 300-16 hardware, see:

• Force 300-16 integrated description on page 2-43

• Force 300-16 part numbers on page 2-43

• Force 300-16 interfaces on page 2-45

• Force 300-16 specifications on page 2-45

• Force 300-16 heater on page 2-46

• Force 300-16 wind loading on page 2-46

• Force 300-16 software packages on page 2-47

The Force 300-16 device is a self-contained

transceiver unit that houses both radio and
networking electronics.

Figure 15 Force 300-16 Integrated

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-49 Force 300-16 part numbersand Table 2-50 Force 300-16 accessory
part numbersinclude the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

PAGE 2-43
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-16

Table 2-49 Force 300-16 part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (FCC) (US cord) C058910C112A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (IC) (Canada/US cord) C050910C114A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (EU) (EU cord) C050910C213A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (EU) (UK cord) C050910C313A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (no cord) C050910C011A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (US cord) C050910C111A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (EU cord) C050910C211A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (UK cord) C050910C311A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (India cord) C050910C411A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (India) (India cord) C050910C412A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (China cord) C050910C511A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910C611A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910C711A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910C811A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910C911A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-16 Radio (ROW) (No PSU) C050910CZ11A

Table 2-50 Force 300-16 accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

PAGE 2-44
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-16

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit.

Table 2-51 Force 300-16 Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

The Force 300-16 integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-52 Force 300-16
physical specificationsand Table 2-53 Force 300-16 environmental specifications
The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

Table 2-52 Force 300-16 physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 12.4 cm x 25.1 cm x 11.9 cm (4.9 in x 9.9 in x 4.7 in) – with
mounting bracket

Weight 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) – with mounting bracket

Table 2-53 Force 300-16 environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +60°C (140°F)

Wind loading 112 mph (180 kph) maximum. See Force 300-16 wind loading
on Force 300-16 wind loading for a full description.

Environmental IP55

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

PAGE 2-45
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-16

At startup, if the Force 300-16 module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-54.

Table 2-54 Force 300-16 startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-55 Force 300-16 wind loading (Kg)and Table 2-56 Force 300-16 wind loading (lb)

PAGE 2-46
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-16

Table 2-55 Force 300-16 wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per

device surface area second)
(square meters)
30 40 50

Force 300-16 0.03 2.8 Kg 5 Kg 7.8 Kg

Integrated

Table 2-56 Force 300-16 wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

Force 300-16 0.34 9.1 lb 14.3 lb 20.6 lb

Integrated

Force 300-16 devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-47
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13

For details of the Force 300-13 hardware, see:

• Force 300-13 integrated description on page 2-48

• Force 300-13-part numbers on page 2-48

• Force 300-13 interfaces on page 2-50

• Force 300-13 specifications on page 2-50

• Force 300-13 heater on page 2-51

• Force 300-13 wind loading on page 2-51

• Force 300-13 software packages on page 2-52

The Force 300-13 device is a self-contained transceiver

unit that houses both radio and networking electronics.

(FCCID:Z8H89FT0048 | IC:109W-0048)

Figure 16 Force 300-13 Integrated radio

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-57 Force 300-13 part numbersand Table 2-58 Force 300-13 accessory
part numbersinclude the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

PAGE 2-48
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13

Table 2-57 Force 300-13 part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (FCC) (US cord) C058900C701A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (IC) (Canada/US cord) C050900C701A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (EU) (EU cord) C050900C702A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (EU) (UK cord) C050900C703A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (no cord) C050900C704A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (US cord) C050900C705A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (EU cord) C050900C706A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (UK cord) C050900C707A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (India cord) C050900C708A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (India) (India cord) C050900C709A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (China cord) C050900C710A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050900C711A
ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050900C712A
ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050900C713A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050900C714A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300-13 SM (ROW) (No PSU) C050900C715A

Table 2-58 Force 300-13 accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

PAGE 2-49
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit.

Table 2-59 Force 300-13 Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

The Force 300-13 integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-60 Force 300-13
physical specificationsand Table 2-61 Force 300-13 environmental specifications
The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

Table 2-60 Force 300-13 physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 12.4 cm x 25.1 cm x 11.9 cm (4.9 in x 9.9 in x 4.7 in) – with
mounting bracket

Weight 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) – with mounting bracket

Antenna Gain 13 dBi

Table 2-61 Force 300-13 environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +60°C (140°F)

Wind loading 112 mph (180 kph) maximum. See Force 300-16 wind loading
on page 2-49 for a full description.

Environmental IP55

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

PAGE 2-50
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13

At startup, if the Force 300-13 module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-62 Force 300-13 startup
times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-62 Force 300-13 startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-63 and Table 2-64.

PAGE 2-51
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13

Table 2-63 Force 300-13 wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

device surface area
30 40 50
(square meters)

Force 300-13 0.03 2.82 Kg 5.02 Kg 7.84 Kg

Integrated

Table 2-64 Force 300-13 wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

Force 300-13 0.28 7.53 lb 11.76 lb 16.93 lb

Integrated

Force 300-16 devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-52
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13L

For details of the Force 300-13L hardware, see:

• Force 300-13L integrated description on page 2-53

• Force 300-13L part numbers on page 2-54

• Force 300-13L interfaces on page 2-55

• Force 300-13L specifications on page 2-55

• Force 300-13L wind loading on page 2-56

• Force 300-13L LEDs on page 2-57

• Force 300-13L software packages on page 2-57

The Force 300-13L device is a self-contained transceiver

unit that houses both radio and networking electronics.
The Force 300-13L uses 802.11ac technology and
supports MU-MIMO and other features offered by the
ePMP 3000 and ePMP 3000L Access Points. It is also
backward compatible with the ePMP 2000 using
backward compatibility features.

Figure 17 Force 300-13L Integrated

PAGE 2-53
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13L

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-65 Force 300-13L part numbers and Table 2-66 Force 300-13L
accessory part numbersinclude the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One-line cord

Table 2-65 Force 300-13L part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (no cord) C050910C031A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (US cord) C050910C131A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (EU cord) C050910C231A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (EU) (EU cord) C050910C233A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (UK cord) C050910C331A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (EU) (UK cord) C050910C333A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (India cord) C050910C431A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (India) (India Cord) C050910C432A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (China cord) C050910C531A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910C631A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910C731A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910C831A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910C931A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 300-13L SM (ROW) (No PSU) C050910CZ31A

Table 2-66 Force 300-13L accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

PAGE 2-54
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13L

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit.

Figure 18 Rear Interfaces

Table 2-67 Force 300-13L Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Ethernet RJ45 24V PoE input 10/100 BaseT

100 Base-TX Ethernet Management and data

For resetting the radio and for setting

Physical the radio back to its factory default
Reset Button N/A
button configuration. See Using the device
external reset button.

The Force 300-13L integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-68 Force 300-13L
physical specificationsand Table 2-69 Force 300-13L environmental specifications
The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

PAGE 2-55
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13L

Table 2-68 Force 300-13L physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 235 x 77 x 58 mm

Weight 0.35 kg (0.88 lbs)

Antenna Gain 13 dBi

Table 2-69 Force 300-13L environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +122°F)

Wind loading 125 km/hour (78 mi/hour)

Environmental IP55

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 125 kph
(78 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and surface area.

PAGE 2-56
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300-13L

Table 2-70 Force 300-13L LED Functions

LED Function

Green: Power is applied to the device

POWER Unlit: No power is applied to the device or improper
power source

WiFi XXX

LAN XXX

Radio scanning: LEDs light in an ascending sequence to

indicate that the radio is scanning

Radio registered: LEDs light to indicate the RSSI level

at the device.

RSSI -70 dBm -80 dBm RSSI

> -60 < RSSI ≤≤ < RSSI ≤ ≤ -80

dBm -60 dBm -70 dBm dBm

Force 300-13L devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

ePMP- NonGPS_Synced-[version].tar.gz (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-57
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300 CSM

For details of the Force 300 CSM hardware, see:

• Force 300 CSM Connectorized Subscriber Module description on page 2-58

• Force 300 CSM part numbers on page 2-59

• Force 300 CSM interfaces on page 2-60

• Force 300 CSM specifications on page 2-60

• Force 300 CSM heater on page 2-61

• Force 300 CSM wind loading on page 2-61

• Force 300 CSM software packages on page 2-62

The Force 300 CSM device is a connectorized Subscriber

Module transceiver unit that houses both radio and
networking electronics.

Figure 19 Force 300 CSM

PAGE 2-58
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300 CSM

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-71 and Table 2-72 includes the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

Table 2-71 Force 300 CSM part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (FCC) (US cord) C058910C122A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (IC) (Canada/US cord) C050910C124A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (EU) (EU cord) C050910C223A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (EU) (UK cord) C050910C323A
ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (no cord) C050910C021A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (US cord) C050910C121A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (EU cord) C050910C221A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (UK cord) C050910C321A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (India cord) C050910C421A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (India) (India cord) C050910C422A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (China cord) C050910C521A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910C621A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910C721A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910C821A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910C921A

ePMP 5GHz Force 300 CSM SM (ROW) (No PSU) C050910CZ21A

Table 2-72 Force 300 CSM accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

PAGE 2-59
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300 CSM

Cambium description Cambium part number

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the unit.

Table 2-73 Force 300 CSM Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

The Force 300 CSM connectorized module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-74 Force
300 CSM physical specificationsand Table 2-75 Force 300 CSM environmental specifications
The module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

Table 2-74 Force 300 CSM physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 220mm x 80mm x 25mm (8.7in x 3.15in x 1.0in)

Weight 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) – with mounting bracket

Table 2-75 Force 300 CSM environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +60C (140°F)

Wind loading 112 mph (180 kph) maximum. See Force 300-16 wind loading
on page 2-61Error! Bookmark not defined. for a full description.

Environmental IP67

PAGE 2-60
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300 CSM

Category Specification

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

At startup, if the Force 300 CSM module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-76 Force 300 CSM
startup times based on ambient temperature

Table 2-76 Force 300 CSM startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted can withstand the prevalent wind
speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national meteorological
offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

PAGE 2-61
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 300 CSM

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-77 Force 300 CSM wind loading (Kg)and Table 2-78 Force 300 CSM wind loading (lb)

Table 2-77 Force 300 CSM wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per

device surface area second)
(square meters)
30 40 50

Force 300 CSM 0.03 2.82 Kg 5.02 Kg 7.84 Kg

Connectorized

Table 2-78 Force 300 CSM wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

Force 300 CSM 0.28 7.53 lb 11.76 lb 16.93 lb

Connectorized

Force 300 CSM devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-62
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP MP3000 MICROPOP

For details of the Force 300 CSM hardware, see:

• ePMP MP 3000 integrated description on page 2-63

• ePMP MP 3000 part numbers on page 2-63

• ePMP MP 3000 interfaces on page 2-65

• ePMP MP 3000 specifications on page 2-65

• ePMP MP 3000 heater on page 2-66

• ePMP MP 3000 wind loading on page 2-66

• ePMP MP 3000 software packages on page 2-67

The ePMP MP 3000 MicroPoP is an integrated access point

designed to serve short-range, low-density applications. It
uses 802.11ac 2x2 architecture and can interoperate with a
Force 300 subscriber module.

Figure 20 ePMP MP 3000 Integrated

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-79 ePMP MP 3000 part numbersand Table 2-80 ePMP MP 3000
accessory part numbersincludes the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

PAGE 2-63
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP MP3000 MICROPOP

Table 2-79 ePMP MP 3000 part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (no cord) C050910A031A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (US cord) C050910A131A
ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (IC) (Canada/US cord) C058910A134A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (EU cord) C050910A231A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (EU) (EU cord) C050910A233A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (UK cord) C050910A331A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (EU) (UK cord) C050910A333A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (India cord) C050910A431A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (India) (India Cord) C050910A432A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (China cord) C050910A531A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050910A631A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050910A731A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050910A831A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050910A931A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (ROW) (No PSU) C050910AZ31A

ePMP 5 GHz MP 3000 MicroPOP Radio (FCC) (US cord) C058910A132A

Table 2-80 ePMP MP 3000 accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

PoE Gigabit DC Injector, 15W Output at 30V, Energy Level 6 Supply N000900L001

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, ARGENTINA N000900L013

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, AUS/NZ N000900L011

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, Brazil N000900L010

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, CHINA N000900L015

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, EU N000900L008

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, INDIA N000900L012

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, UK N000900L009

CABLE, UL POWER SUPPLY CORD SET, US N000900L007

PAGE 2-64
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP MP3000 MICROPOP

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit.

Table 2-81 ePMP MP 3000 – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables

used for providing power or are
connected to power ports (PoE) must
be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

The ePMP MP 3000 integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-82 ePMP MP
3000 physical specificationsand Table 2-83 ePMP MP 3000 environmental specifications The integrated
module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not provide lightning
suppression.

Table 2-82 ePMP MP 3000 physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 220mm x 80mm x 25mm (8.7in x 3.15in x 1.0in)

Weight 0.5 kg (1.1 lbs) – with mounting bracket

Antenna Integrated dual-polarized, Omni-direction 8dBi

Table 2-83 ePMP MP 3000 environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -40°C (-40°F) to +65C (149°F) ambient op temp

Wind loading 224 kph 320mm x 215mm x 65mm 1100g

Environmental IP67

Note: This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368

edition 2 specification, and the radio housings are designed to
be raintight.

PAGE 2-65
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP MP3000 MICROPOP

At startup, if the ePMP MP 3000 module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-86.

Table 2-84 ePMP MP 3000 startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph
(124 mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-85 and Table 2-86.

PAGE 2-66
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE EPMP MP3000 MICROPOP

Table 2-85 ePMP MP 3000 wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP Largest Wind speed (meters per

device surface area second)
(square meters)
30 40 50

ePMP MP 3000 0.03 2.82 Kg 5.02 Kg 7.84 Kg

Integrated

Table 2-86 ePMP MP 3000 wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface Wind speed (miles per hour)
area (square
feet) 80 100 120

ePMP MP 3000 0.28 7.53 lb 11.76 lb 16.93 lb

ePMP MP 3000 devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AC-v4.5-GA.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-67
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 425

For details of the Force 425 hardware, see:

• Force 425 integrated description on page 2-68

• Force 425 part numbers on page 2-68
• Force 425 mounting bracket with Range Extender on page 2-70
• Force 425 interfaces on page 2-70
• Force 425 specifications on page 2-70
• Force 425 heater on page 2-71
• Force 425 software packages on page 2-72

The Force 425 device is a self-contained transceiver unit that

houses both radio and networking electronics.

Figure 21 Force 425 Integrated

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions.

Each of the parts listed in Table 2-87 includes the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

PAGE 2-68
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 425

Table 2-87 ePMP Force 425 part numbers

Cambium part
Cambium description
number

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (no cord) - Priced per radio C050940M001A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (US cord) - Priced per radio C050940M101A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (IC) (Canada/US cord) - Priced per C058940M104A
radio

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (EU cord) - Priced per radio C050940M201A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (EU) (EU cord) - Priced per radio C050940M203A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (UK cord) - Priced per radio C050940M301A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (EU) (UK cord) - Priced per radio C050940M303A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (India cord) - Priced per radio C050940M401A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (India) (India Cord) - Priced per radio C050940M402A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (China cord) - Priced per radio C050940M501A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (Brazil cord) - Priced per radio C050940M601A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (Argentina cord) - Priced per C050940M701A
radio

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (ANZ cord) - Priced per radio C050940M801A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (South Africa cord) - Priced C050940M901A
per radio

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (ROW) (No PSU) - Priced per radio C050940MZ01A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 425 SM 2-pack packaging (FCC) (US Cord) - Priced per radio C058940M102A

Table 2-88 Force 425 accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP Force 425 Range Extender Dish Accessory 4-Pack Packaging, priced N000900L062A
per unit

PAGE 2-69
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 425

The Force 425 module is designed to be pole-mounted

using the mounting bracket provided in the box with the
radio.

Figure 22 Force 425 module mounting

bracket with Range Extender

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit. This interface is described in Table 2-89.

Table 2-89 Force 425 Series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE).

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

SFP 10 Gigabit cage Optional 10 Gigabit SFP cage for SFP module

The Force 425 integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-90 and Table 91.

The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

PAGE 2-70
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 425

Table 2-90 Force 425 physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 470 mm diameter x 285 mm depth (18.5 in diameter x 11.2 in depth)

Weight 4.8 kg (10.6 lbs.)

Table 2-91 Force 425 environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C to 65°C (-22°F to 149°F)

Wind loading 200 km/hour (124 mph)

Humidity 95% condensing

Environmental IP67

At startup, if the Force 425 module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated, and the unit continues its
startup sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-92.

Table 2-92 Force 425 startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) H 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
dominant wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 200 kph (124
mph).

Wind blowing on the device subjects the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The magnitude
of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading is
estimated using the following formulae:

PAGE 2-71
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 425

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-93 and Table 2-94.

Table 2-93 Force 425 wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP device Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

surface area (square meters)
40 50 60

Force 425 Integrated 0.15 25.08 Kg 39.2 Kg 56.43 Kg

Table 2-94 Force 425 wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface area (square feet) Wind speed (miles per hour)

80 100 120

Force 425 Integrated 1.61 43.28 lb 67.62 lb 97.37 lb

Force 425 devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named:

• ePMP-AX-v5.0.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-72
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 400C

For details of the Force 400C hardware, see:

• Force 400C integrated description on page 2-73

• Force 400C part numbers on page 2-73
• Force 400C interfaces on page 2-74
• Force 400C specifications on page 2-75
• Force 400C heater on page 2-75
• Force 400C wind loading on page 2-75
• Force 400C software packages on page 2-76

The Force 400C device is a self-contained transceiver unit

that houses both radio and networking electronics.

Figure 23 Force 400C Integrated

Choose the correct regional variant to adhere to local licensing restrictions. Each of the parts listed
includes the following items:

• One integrated unit

• One power supply 1000/100 Base-TX LAN injector

• One line cord

PAGE 2-73
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 400C

Table 2-95 Force 400C part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (no cord) C050940C021A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (US cord) C050940C121A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (IC) (Canada/US cord) C058940C124A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (EU cord) C050940C221A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (EU) (EU cord) C050940C223A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (UK cord) C050940C321A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (EU) (UK cord) C050940C323A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (India cord) C050940C421A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (India) (India Cord) C050940C422A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (China cord) C050940C521A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (Brazil cord) C050940C621A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (Argentina cord) C050940C721A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (ANZ cord) C050940C821A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (South Africa cord) C050940C921A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (ROW) (No PSU) C050940CZ21A

ePMP 5 GHz Force 400C (FCC) (US Cord) C058940C122A

Table 2-96 Force 400C accessory part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

ePMP Force 400 spares kit N000900L061A

The Ethernet port is located on the rear of the integrated unit.

Table 2-97 Force 400C series – rear interfaces

Port name Connector Interface Description

Eth RJ45 PoE input Power over Ethernet (PoE)

100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data

SFP 10 Gigabit cage Optional 10 Gigabit SFP cage for SFP module

PAGE 2-74
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 400C

The Force 400C integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-98 and

Table 2-99.

The integrated module meets the low-level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 6-62 and provides internal surge suppression but does not
provide lightning suppression.

Table 2-98 Force 400C physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (Diameter x Depth) 256 mm x 125 mm x 46 mm (10.1 in x 4.9 in. x 1.8 in.)

Weight 1.3 kg (2.9 lbs.)

Table 2-99 Force 400C environmental specifications

Category Specification

Temperature -30°C to 65°C (-22°F to 149°F)

Wind loading 200 km/hour (124 mph)

Environmental IP67

At startup, if the Force 400C module temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C), an internal heater is
activated to ensure that the device can successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated
when the unit is powered on and will not apply heat to the device once the startup is complete. When
the unit temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C), the heater is deactivated and the unit continues its
start-up sequence.

The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 2-100.

Table 2-100 Force 400C startup times based on ambient temperature

Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational)

-22°F (-30°C) H 20 minutes

-4°F (-20°C) 6 minutes

14°F (-10°C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds

Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics are available from national
meteorological offices.

PAGE 2-75
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE FORCE 400C

The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 180 kph (124
mph).

Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and the surface area of the device. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:

Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2

Where: Is:

a the surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second

Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2

Where: Is:

A the surface area in square feet

v wind speed in miles per hour

Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are
shown in Table 2-101 and Table 2-102.

Table 2-101 Force 400C wind loading (Kg)

Type of ePMP device Largest Wind speed (meters per second)

surface area (square meters)
30 40 50

Force 400C Integrated 0.03 2.82 Kg 5.02 Kg 7.84 Kg

Table 2-102 Force 400C wind loading (lb)

Type of ePMP device Largest surface area (square feet) Wind speed (miles per hour)

80 100 120

Force 400C Integrated 0.28 7.53 lb 11.76 lb 16.93 lb

Force 400C devices may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium
Networks website or by using cnMaestro. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios
are named.

• ePMP-AX-v5.0.img (or higher version number)

PAGE 2-76
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

For details of the ePMP power supply units, see:

• Power supply description on page 2-77

• Power supply part numbers on page 2-77
• Power supply interfaces on page 2-78
• Power supply specifications on page 2-79
• Power supply location considerations on page 2-79

The power supply unit that is connected to the ePMP modules is rated for indoor use. The ePMP
modules are installed outdoors and terminated to network equipment using Cat5e cables with RJ45
connectors. The Cat5e cables are plugged into an AC or DC power supply to inject Power over Ethernet
(PoE) into the module. The Cat5e cables connected to the power supply transitioning from indoors to
outdoors must be rated for outdoor use.

All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables used for providing power or are connected to power
ports (PoE) must be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

Each module requires one power supply and one power supply line cord (line cord included with radio
device, see Table 2-103.

Table 2-103 Power supply part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number Device Compatibility

ePMP Power Supply for GPS Radio - no ePMP MP 3000 Access Point
N000900L001
cord (spare)

POWER SUPPLY, 30W, 56V – Gbps ePMP 3000 Access Point

N000000L034
support

Each ePMP device must be powered by the corresponding power supply listed in Table
2-103. This product is intended to be supplied by a UL Listed Power Supply Unit
marked "LPS" or "PS2" and providing power over the Ethernet (PoE)" supply.

PAGE 2-77
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

The power supply interfaces are illustrated in Figure 24 Power supply interfacesand described in Table
2-104 Power supply interface functions - N000900L001 and Table 2-105 Power supply interface
functions - N000000L034

Figure 24 Power supply interfaces

Gigabit
Power
Data
input

Gigabit Data
+ Power

Table 2-104 Power supply interface functions - N000900L001

Interface Function

Power input Mains power input.

Power output 30V

RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to the radio.

Gigabit Data + Power Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables used for providing power or are
connected to power ports (PoE) must be UL certified with VW-1
markings.

Gigabit Data RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to the network.

Table 2-105 Power supply interface functions - N000000L034

Interface Function

Power input Mains power input.

Power output 56V

RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to the radio

Gigabit Data + Power Note: All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables used for providing power or are
connected to power ports (PoE) must be UL certified with VW-1
markings.

Gigabit Data RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to the network.

PAGE 2-78
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

Table 2-106 Power Supply LED functions

LED Function

Power (green) Power supply detection

The ePMP power supply conforms to the specifications listed in Table 2-107, Table 2-108, and Table 2-
109.

Table 2-107 Power supply physical specifications

Category Specification

Dimensions (H x W x D) 14 x 6.5 x 3.6 cm (5.5 x 2.55 x 1.42 in)

Weight 0.26 lbs

Table 2-108 Power supply environmental specifications

Category Specification

Ambient Operating Temperature 0°C to +40°C

Humidity 20% - 90%

Table 2-109 Power supply electrical specifications

Category Specification

AC Input 100 to 240 VAC

Efficiency Meets Energy Level 6

Over Current Protection Short circuit, with auto-recovery

Hold uptime 10 ms minimum at maximum load, 120 VAC

Find a location for the power supply that meets the following requirements:

• The power supply is rated for indoor use and can be mounted on a wall or other flat surface.
• The power supply must be kept dry, with no possibility of condensation, flooding, or rising
dampness.
• The power supply can be accessed to view status indicators.
• The power supply can be connected to the ePMP module drop cable and network terminating
equipment.

PAGE 2-79
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY

• The power supply can be connected to a mains or DC power supply that meets the requirements
defined in Table 2-109.

PAGE 2-80
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE ETHERNET CABLING

For more information on the Ethernet cabling components of an ePMP installation, see:

• Ethernet standards and cable lengths on page 2-81

• Outdoor Cat5e cable on page 2-81

All configurations require a copper Ethernet connection from the power supply port to the power
supply and network terminating equipment.

All cables used for outdoor installations must be suitable to be used for that
environment and rated accordingly.

For each power supply, the maximum permitted drop cable length is specified in Table 2-110 Power
supply drop cable length restrictions

Table 2-110 Power supply drop cable length restrictions

Part number Description Maximum cable length (*1)

N000900L001 Power Supply for Radio with Gigabit 330 feet (100m)
Ethernet (no cord)
N000000L034

(*1) The maximum length of Ethernet cable from the device to the network device needs to follow 802.3
standards. If the power supply is not the network device the cable from the power supply to the
network device must be included in the total maximum cable length.

Cambium Industrial Cable uses 24-gauge solid bare copper conductors, covered by bonded-pair
polymer insulation. The conductors are protected by double-layer shielding consisting of a solid foil
layer under the braided tinned copper mesh, providing excellent shielding while maximizing flexibility.
And, the cable is jacketed by industrial-grade UV-resistant, abrasion-resistant, and oil-resistant PVC.

Cambium’s Industrial RJ45 connectors are specifically designed to work optimally with Cambium
Industrial Cable.

PAGE 2-81
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE ETHERNET CABLING

The connectors are fully shielded with integrated strain relief for greater pull strength, utilize a
staggered contact design that minimizes crosstalk, and maximizes electrical performance, and the
contacts are plated with 50 micro-inch thick 24-carat gold, exceeding TIA-1096 specifications and
ensuring the best possible connection and oxidation resistance.

Cambium Networks’ industrial-grade cable is well suited for high-quality durable installations of
subscriber modules, access points, and enterprise point-to-point links as well as in tactical non-
permanent deployments of infrastructure.

Table 2-111 Cambium Industrial Cable part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number

Industrial Grade CAT 5 Cable 50 meter unterminated N000000L106A

Industrial Grade CAT 5 Cable 100 meter unterminated N000000L106A

Industrial Grade CAT 5 Cable 300 meter unterminated N000000L108A

Industrial Grade RJ45 Connector 100 Pack C000000L109A

Termination Tool for C000000L109A RJ45 connectors C000000L110A

All RJ45 Ethernet LAN cables used for providing power or are connected to power
ports (PoE) must be UL certified with VW-1 markings.

PAGE 2-82
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE SURGE SUPPRESSION UNIT

Structures, equipment, and people must be protected against power surges (typically caused by
lightning) by conducting the surge current to the ground via a separate preferential solid path.

The actual degree of protection required depends on local conditions and applicable local regulations.
To adequately protect an ePMP installation, both ground bonding and transient voltage surge
suppression are required.

Network operators should always follow best practices for grounding and lightning protection. Doing so
will minimize network outages and reduce the associated costs of tower climbs and equipment
repair/replacement.

Lightning-prone installations can be improved by:

• Installing a surge suppressor near the device (transient surge suppression)

• Grounding the device to the pole (ground bonding)

• Lowering the device/dish such that it is not the highest metallic object on the
pole.

The Gigabit Ethernet surge suppressor is critical for lightning protection to

minimize the potential for damage.

Table 2-112 Surge suppressor part numbers

Cambium description Cambium part number Device Compatibility

Force 300-25

Force 300-19(R)
Gigabit Surge Suppressor (30V) C000000L065A
Force 300-16

Force 300-13

Gigabit Surge Suppressor (56V) C000000L033A ePMP 3000 Access Point

PAGE 2-83
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE SURGE SUPPRESSION UNIT

Choose the 30V or 56V surge suppressor option based on your installed device power
rating. Installing a 30V surge suppressor for a 56V device or a 56V surge suppressor
for a 30V device may result in inadequate surge protection. Refer to Table 2-112 for
more details.

PAGE 2-84
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM HARDWARE CNPULSE SYNC GENERATOR

cnPulse is the latest GPS synchronization generation

device designed specifically for Cambium Networks PMP
and PTP radios. The cnPulse module is *IP67
(weatherproof and supports a wide temperature range
for rugged environments. The GPS receiver is highly
reliable and supports both GPS and GNSS signals.

cnPulse receives its power from the CAT-5 drop cable in

mode 2 so no external power supply is required. There
are no configuration or software settings required. For
ePMP 3000, cnPulse is deployed in-line with the radio’s
CAT-5 drop cable.

For more information, please see:

http://community.cambiumnetworks.com/t5/cnPulse/bd-p/cnPulse

This product meets the UL/cUL 62368 / IEC 62368 edition 2 specification, and the
radio housings are designed to be raintight.

PAGE 2-85
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING CNPULSE SYNC GENERATOR

Chapter 3: System Planning

This chapter provides information to help the user to plan an ePMP link.

The following topics are described in this chapter:

• How to plan ePMP links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of
operation is explained under Radio spectrum planning on page 3-2.

• Factors to be considered when planning links such as range, path loss, and throughput are
described under Link planning on page 3-5.

• The grounding and lightning protection requirements of an ePMP installation are described under
Grounding and lightning protection on page 2-2.

• Factors to be considered when planning ePMP data networks are described under Data network
planning on page 3-7.

PAGE 3-1
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING RADIO SPECTRUM PLANNING

This section describes how to plan ePMP links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the
country of operation.

The user must ensure the ePMP product operates in accordance with local regulatory
limits.

Contact the applicable radio regulator to check if the registration of the ePMP link is
required.

The wireless specifications that apply to ePMP 802.11ac variants are listed under Table 3-1. The wireless
specifications that are specific to each frequency variant are listed in Table 3-2.
Table 3-1 Wireless specifications (all variants)

Item Specification

Manual selection (fixed frequency)

Channel selection
Automatic Channel Selection

To avoid interference with other users of the band, maximum power

Manual power control
can be set lower than the default power limit.

ePMP 3000 Access Point: 33 dBm

Force 300-25: 29 dBm

Maximum transmit power Force 300-19(R): 28dBm

Force 300-16: 29 dBm

Force 300-13: 28dBm

Force 300-25: Dish antenna

Force 300-19(R): Integrated patch

Integrated device antenna type
Force 300-16: Integrated patch

Force 300-13: Integrated patch

Duplex scheme Adaptive TDD

Over-the-air encryption AES

Error Correction FEC

PAGE 3-2
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING RADIO SPECTRUM PLANNING

Table 3-2 Wireless specifications, 5 GHz band

Item 5 GHz

RF band (GHz) 4.910 – 5.970 MHz

Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz, or 80 MHz

Integrated dish antenna – 25 dBi

Integrated patch antenna – 16 dBi

Typical antenna gain Sector antenna – 17 dBi

Dual-Horn antenna – 13 dBi

Omni antenna – 13 dBi

Integrated Dish: 6-10° azimuth, 6-10° elevation

Integrated Patch: 15° azimuth, 30° elevation

Antenna 3dB beamwidth Sector antenna: 70° azimuth, 6° elevation

Dual-Horn antenna: 45° azimuth/elevation

Omni antenna: 360° azimuth, 7° elevation

The local regulator may restrict frequency usage and channel width and may limit the amount of
conducted or radiated transmitter power.

Many countries impose EIRP limits (Allowed EIRP) on products operating in the bands used by the
ePMP Series. For example, in the 5 GHz band, these limits are calculated as follows:

• In the 5.8 GHz band (5725 MHz to 5875 MHz), the EIRP must not exceed the lesser of 36 dBm or (23
+ 10 x Log Channel width in MHz) dBm.
Some countries (for example the USA) impose conducted power limits on products operating in the 5
GHz band.

Ensure the link is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by configuring the correct
country code (located in the web management interface, under Configure > Radio). In the following
situations, the country code does not automatically prevent operation outside the regulations:

• When operating in ETSI regions, it is required to enter a license key in the ePMP web management
interface to unlock valid country-specific frequencies. This key may be obtained from
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/licensekeys/epmp.

PAGE 3-3
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING RADIO SPECTRUM PLANNING

The available spectrum for the operation depends on the region. When configured with the appropriate
country code, the unit will only allow operation on those channels which are permitted by the
regulations.

Certain regulations have allocated certain channels as unavailable for use:

• Some European countries have allocated part of the 5.8 GHz band to Road Transport and Traffic
Telematics (RTTT) systems.
Where regulatory restrictions apply to certain channels, these channels are barred automatically by the
use of the correct country code. For example, at 5.8 GHz in some European countries, the RTTT band
5795 MHz to 5815 MHz is barred. With the appropriate country code configured for this region, the
ePMP will not operate on channels within this band.

The number and identity of channels barred by the license key and country code are dependent on the
channel bandwidth.

Select the required channel bandwidth for the link. The selection depends upon the ePMP frequency
variant and country code, as specified on page 6-74.

The wider a channel bandwidth the greater is its capacity. As narrower channel bandwidths take up less
spectrum, selecting a narrow channel bandwidth may be a better choice when operating in locations
where the spectrum is very busy.

Both ends of the link must be configured to operate on the same channel bandwidth.

PAGE 3-4
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING LINK PLANNING

This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, obstacles
path loss, and throughput.

Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance.

Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions (such as trees or buildings) in the path and to assess
the risk of interference. This information is necessary to achieve an accurate link feasibility assessment.

Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two ends of the link. The
path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way (Free Space
Path Loss), the attenuation caused by obstacles (Excess Path Loss), and a margin to allow for possible
fading of the radio signal (Fade Margin). The following calculation needs to be performed to judge
whether a particular link can be installed:

L free _ space + Lexcess + L fade + Lseasonal  Lcapability

Where: Is:

L free _ space Free Space Path Loss (dB)

Lexcess Excess Path Loss (dB)

L fade Fade Margin Required (dB)

Lseasonal Seasonal Fading (dB)

Lcapability Equipment Capability (dB)

Free space path loss is a major determinant in received (Rx) signal level. Rx signal level, in turn, is a
major factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated as follows:

System Operating Margin (fade margin) dB = Rx signal level (dB) – Rx sensitivity (dB)

Thus, the fade margin is the difference between the strength of the received signal and the strength that
the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link.

PAGE 3-5
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING LINK PLANNING

Adaptive modulation ensures that the highest throughput that can be achieved instantaneously will be
obtained, taking account of propagation and interference. When the link has been installed, web pages
provide information about the link loss currently measured by the equipment, both instantaneously and
averaged.

PAGE 3-6
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING DATA NETWORK PLANNING

This section describes factors to be considered when planning ePMP data networks.

The ePMP Ethernet ports conform to the specifications listed in Table 3-3.

Table 3-3 Ethernet bridging specifications

Ethernet Bridging Specification

10BASE-Te/100BASE-Tx/1000BASE-T IEEE 802.3

Protocol IEEE 802.3at (PoE)

IEEE802.3u compliant Auto-negotiation

Interface 10/100/1000BaseT (RJ-45)

Maximum Ethernet Frame Size 1700 bytes

Service classes for bridged

3 classes
traffic

Practical Ethernet rates will depend on network configuration, higher layer protocols,
and platforms used.

Over the air, throughput will be capped to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the
receiving end of the link.

Decide if the IP interface of the device management agent will be connected in a VLAN. If so, decide if
this is a standard (IEEE 802.1Q) VLAN or provider bridged (IEEE 802.1ad) VLAN, and select the VLAN ID
for this VLAN.

The use of a separate management VLAN is strongly recommended. The use of the management VLAN
helps to ensure that the device management agent cannot be accessed by customers.

PAGE 3-7
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM PLANNING DATA NETWORK PLANNING

Decide how the quality of service will be configured in ePMP to minimize frame loss and latency for
high-priority traffic. Wireless links often have lower data capacity than wired links or network equipment
like switches and routers, and quality of service configuration is most critical at network bottlenecks.

ePMP provides three priority types for traffic waiting for transmission over the wireless link – Voice,
High and Low. Low is the lowest priority and Voice is the highest priority. Traffic is scheduled using
strict priority; in other words, traffic in a given priority is transmitted when all higher-priority
transmissions are complete.

PAGE 3-8
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT DATA NETWORK PLANNING
INTERFACE

Chapter 4: Using the Device Management

Interface

This chapter describes all configuration and alignment tasks that are performed when an ePMP system
is deployed.

Configure the units by performing the following tasks:

• Preparing for configuration on page 4-2

• Connecting to the unit on page 4-3
• Using the web interface on page 4-5
• Using the installation wizard – Access Point on page 4-7
• Using the installation wizard – Subscriber Module on page 4-12
• Using the menu options on page 4-16

PAGE 4-1
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT PREPARING FOR CONFIGURATION
INTERFACE

This section describes the checks to be performed before proceeding with the unit configuration.

All national and local safety standards must be followed while configuring the units.

Ensure that personnel is not exposed to unsafe levels of RF energy. The units start to
radiate as soon as they are powered up. Respect the safety standards defined in
Compliance with safety standards on page 6-61, in particular, the minimum separation
distances.

Observe the following guidelines:

Never work in front of the antenna when the device is powered. Always power down the power supply
before connecting or disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the module.

All applicable radio regulations must be followed while configuring the units and aligning the antennas.
For more information, Compliance with safety standards on page 6-62.

PAGE 4-2
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT CONNECTING TO THE UNIT
INTERFACE

To connect the unit to a management PC, use the following procedures:

• Configuring the management PC on page 4-3

• Connecting to the PC and powering up on page 4-4

Use this procedure to configure the local management PC to communicate with the ePMP module.

Procedure:

1 Select Properties for the Ethernet port.

In Windows 7 this is found in Control Panel >

Network and Internet >
Network Connections > Local Area Connection.

2 Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item:

3 Click Properties.

4 Enter an IP address that is valid for the

169.254.1.x network, avoiding 169.254.1.1. A Figure 25 Local Area Connection Properties
good example is 169.254.1.100:

5 Enter a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

Leave the default gateway blank.

6 Click OK and then click Close.

PAGE 4-3
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT CONNECTING TO THE UNIT
INTERFACE

Use this procedure to connect a management PC directly to the ePMP for configuration and alignment
purposes and to power up the ePMP device.

Procedure:

1 Check that the device and power supply are correctly connected (the device Ethernet port is
connected to the power supply Ethernet power port (“Gigabit Data+Power” or “10/100Mbit
Data+Power”).

2 Connect the PC Ethernet port to the LAN ( “Gigabit Data” or “10/100Mbit Data”) port of the
power supply using a standard (not crossed) Ethernet cable.

3 Apply mains or battery power to the power supply. The green Power LED must illuminate
continuously.

If the Power and Ethernet LEDs do not illuminate correctly, see Testing hardware on
page 5-4.

PAGE 4-4
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE WEB INTERFACE
INTERFACE

To understand how to use the ePMP web interface, see:

• Logging into the web interface on page 4-5

Use this procedure to log into the web interface as a system administrator.

Equipment and tools:

• ePMP device connected to the power supply by Ethernet cable.

• PC is connected to the power supply by Ethernet cable.
• Power Supply powered up.
• Minimum supported browser version – Chrome v29, Firefox v24, Internet Explorer 10, Safari v5.

Procedure:

1 Check that the device and power supply are correctly connected (the device Ethernet port is
connected to the power supply Ethernet power port (“Gigabit Data+Power” or “10/100Mbit
Data+Power”).

2 Configure the host machine with an IP address in the 169.254.1.x subnet (excluding 169.254.1.1)

3 Connect the PC Ethernet port to the LAN ( “Gigabit Data” or “10/100Mbit Data”) port of the power
supply using a standard (not crossed) Ethernet cable.

4 Connect the power supply to power mains

5 In your browser, navigate to the device's default IP address 169.254.1.1.

6 Log in with username admin and password admin

If Device IP address Mode is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP
address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to 192.168.0.1 (AP
Mode), 192.168.0.2 (SM mode), or the previously-configured static Device IP Address.
Units may always be accessed via the Ethernet port at 169.254.1.1.

PAGE 4-5
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE WEB INTERFACE
INTERFACE

New ePMP devices all contain default username and password configurations. It is
recommended to change these password configurations immediately. These passwords
may be configured in the management GUI in section Configuration > System >
Account Management.

PAGE 4-6
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE ACCESS POINT

The ePMP device features a guided configuration mechanism for configuring key parameters for link
operation.

This setup is accessed on the Installation page by clicking the Start Setup button.

Click Finish Setup to commit the changes to the device.

Figure 26 Quick Start page

Attribute Description

Main

Device Name The configured identifier used in an NMS such as cnMaestro

Backward Enabled: 802.11n ePMP subscribers can register to the AP (requires subscriber
Compatibility software upgrade).

Disabled: 802.11n ePMP subscribers are not able to register to the AP.

SSID SSID is a unique identifier for a wireless LAN which is specified in the Access Point’s
beacon. (Access Point Mode). SSID must be the same at both ends and different
from the site name.

PAGE 4-7
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE ACCESS POINT

Figure 27 Radio parameters page

Attribute Description

Radio

Country Defines the country code being used by the device. The country code of the
Subscriber Module follows the country code of the associated Access Point unless
it is an FCC SKU in which case the country code is the United States or Canada.
Country code defines the regulatory rules in use for the device.

Driver Mode TDD: The device is operating in point-to-multipoint (PMP) mode using TDD
scheduling. The AP can GPS synchronize in this mode.

ePTP Master: The Access Point is operating as a Master in point-to-point mode.

The AP does not support GPS Synchronization in this mode but can provide
significantly lower latency than other modes. QoS (MIR and traffic priority)
capability and Link Quality/Capacity indicators are not available in this mode.

TDD PTP: The Access Point is operating in point-to-point (PTP) mode using TDD
scheduling. The AP can GPS synchronize in this mode.

Downlink/Uplink The schedule of downlink traffic to uplink traffic on the radio link. The three
Ratio options, 75/25, 50/50, and 30/70, allow the radio to operate in a fixed ratio on
every frame. In other words, this ratio represents the amount of the total radio
link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for downlink resources, and the
amount of the total radio link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for uplink
resources.

Max Range This parameter represents the cell coverage radius. Subscriber Modules outside
the configured radius will not be able to connect. It is recommended to configure
Max Range to match the actual physical distance of the farthest subscriber.

Channel
Configure the channel size used by the radio for RF transmission.
Bandwidth

Frequency Carrier Configure the frequency carrier for RF transmission. This list is dynamically
adjusted to the regional restrictions based on the setting of the Country
parameter. Ensure that a thorough spectrum analysis has been completed before
configuring this parameter.

PAGE 4-8
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE ACCESS POINT

Figure 28 Network parameters page

Attribute Description

Network

IP Assignment Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields IP

Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS Server.

DHCP: Device management IP addressing (IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and
DNS Server) is assigned via a network DHCP server, and parameters IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS Server are not
configurable.

IP Address Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet
protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network.

If IP Address Assignment is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP

address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to fallback IP
192.168.0.1 (Access Point) or 192.168.0.2 (Subscriber Module).

Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if the IP
Address is configured to 192.168.2.1 and Subnet Mask is configured to
255.255.255.0, the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X.

Gateway Configure the IP address of the device on the current network that acts as a
gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other
networks.

PAGE 4-9
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE ACCESS POINT

Attribute Description

Preferred DNS
Configure the primary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution.
Server

Alternate DNS
Configure the secondary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution.
Server

Figure 29 Security parameters page

Attribute Descrption

Network

Wireless Security Open: All Subscriber Module devices requesting network entry are allowed
registration.

WPA2: The WPA2 mechanism provides AES radio link encryption and Subscriber
Module network entry authentication. When enabled, the Subscriber Module must
register using the Authentication Pre-shared Key configured on the Access Point
and Subscriber Module.

RADIUS: Enables Subscriber Module authentication via a pre-configured Radius

server.

PAGE 4-10
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE ACCESS POINT

Attribute Descrption

WPA2 Pre-shared Configure this key on the Access Point, then configure the Subscriber Module with
Key this key to complete the authentication configuration. This key must be between 8
to 128 symbols.

Servers Up to 3 RADIUS servers can be configured on the device with the following
attributes:

IP Address: IP Address of the RADIUS server on the network.

Port: The RADIUS server port. The default is 1812.

Secret: Secret key that is used to communicate with the RADIUS server.

GUI User This parameter applies to both the AP and its registered SMs.
Authentication
Device Local Only: The device GUI authentication is local to the device using one of
the accounts configured under Configuration > System > Account Management.

Remote RADIUS Server Only: The device GUI authentication is performed using a
RADIUS server.

Remote RADIUS Server and Fallback to Local: The device GUI authentication is
performed using a RADIUS server. Upon failure of authentication through a RADIUS
server, the authentication falls back to one of the local accounts configured under
Configuration > System > Account Management.

PAGE 4-11
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE SUBSCRIBER MODULE

The ePMP device features a guided configuration mechanism for configuring key parameters for link
operation.

This setup is accessed on the Installation page by clicking the Start Setup button.

Click Finish Setup to commit the changes to the device.

Figure 30 Main system parameters page

Attribute Description

Main

Device Name The configured identifier used in an NMS such as cnMaestro

Radio Mode This parameter controls the function of the device – All ePMP devices may be
configured to operate as an Access Point (AP) or a Subscriber Module (SM).

PAGE 4-12
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE SUBSCRIBER MODULE

Figure 31 Radio parameters page

Attribute Description

Radio

Preferred APs

SSID The Preferred Access Points SSID defines the Access Point SSID to which the
Subscriber Module device will attempt registration.

Wireless Security Open: The Subscriber Module device will attempt registration to the Preferred
Access Points SSID with no security mechanism.

WPA2: The WPA2 mechanism provides AES radio link encryption and Subscriber
Module network entry authentication. When enabled, the Subscriber Module must
register using the Authentication Pre-shared Key configured on the Access Point
and Subscriber Module.

WPA2 Pre-shared The Preferred Access Points WPA2 Pre-shared Key must be configured on the
Key Subscriber Module device to match the pre-shared key configured on the Access
Point for registration with WPA2 security.

Scan Channel
Configure the channel size used by the radio for RF transmission.
Bandwidth

Radio Frequency Configure the frequency carrier for RF transmission. This list is dynamically
Scan List adjusted to the regional restrictions based on the setting of the Country
parameter. Ensure that a thorough spectrum analysis has been completed before
configuring this parameter.

PAGE 4-13
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE SUBSCRIBER MODULE

Figure 32 Network parameters page

Attribute Description

Network

Network Mode NAT: The SM acts as a router and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their IP
header (source or destination).

Bridge: The SM acts as a switch and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their
MAC destination address.

Router: The SM acts as a router and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their
IP header (source or destination) using specific static routes and IP aliases
configured by the operator.

IP Assignment Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields IP

Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS Server.

DHCP: Device management IP addressing (IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and
DNS Server) is assigned via a network DHCP server, and parameters IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS Server are not
configurable.

IP Address Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet
protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network.

If IP Address Assignment is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP

address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to fallback IP
192.168.0.1 (Access Point) or 192.168.0.2 (Subscriber Module).

PAGE 4-14
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE INSTALLATION WIZARD –
INTERFACE SUBSCRIBER MODULE

Attribute Description

Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if the IP
Address is configured to 192.168.2.1 and Subnet Mask is configured to 255.255.255.0,
the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X.

Gateway Configure the IP address of the device on the current network that acts as a
gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other
networks.

Preferred DNS
Configure the primary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution.
Server

Alternate DNS
Configure the secondary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution.
Server

Attribute Description

Network

EAP-TTLS Configure the EAP-TTLS Username to match the credentials on the RADIUS server
Username being used for the network.

Use Ethernet MAC The device MAC Address can be used as the EAP-TTLS Username in either “:” or “-“
Address at EAP- delimited format.
TTLS Username

EAP-TTLS Configure the EAP-TTLS Password to match the credentials on the RADIUS server
Password being used for the network.

Authentication Configure this Identity string to match the credentials on the RADIUS server being
Identity String used for the network. The default value for this parameter is “anonymous”.

Authentication Configure this Identity string to match the credentials on the RADIUS server being
Identity Realm used for the network. The default value for this parameter is
“cambiumnetworks.com”.

PAGE 4-15
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Use the menu navigation bar in the left panel to navigate to each web page. Some of the menu options
are only displayed for specific system configurations. Use Table 4-1 to locate information about using
each web page.

Table 4-1 Menu options and web pages

Main menu Menu option Web page information

Status Status page on page 4-17

Installation Installation page on page 4-20

Configuration Configuration menu on page 4-20

Radio Configuration > Radio page on page 4-20

System Configuration > System page on page 4-35Error!

Bookmark not defined.

Network Configuration > Network page on page 4-39

Security Configuration > Security page on page 4-56

Monitor Monitor menu on page 4-60

Performance Monitor > Performance page on page 4-61

System Monitor > System page on page 4-66

Wireless Monitor > Wireless page on page 4-68

Throughput Chart Monitor > Throughput Chart page on page 4-73

GPS Monitor > GPS page (Access Point Mode) on page 4-

73

Network Monitor > Network page on page 4-75

System Log Monitor > System Log page on page 4-78

Tools Tools menu on page 4-78

Software Upgrade Tools > Software Upgrade page on page 4-78

Backup / Restore Tools > Backup/Restore page on page 4-80

License Management Tools > License Management page (Access Point

Mode) on page 4-82

Spectrum Analyzer Tools > Spectrum Analyzer page on page 4-84

eAlign Tools > eAlign page on page 4-84

Wireless Link Test Tools > Wireless Link Test page on page 4-86

PAGE 4-16
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Main menu Menu option Web page information

Watchdog Tools > Watchdog page on page 4-87

Ping Tools > Ping page on page 4-88

Traceroute Tools > Traceroute page on page 4-90

Figure 33 Status page

Table 4-2 Status page attributes

Attribute Description

Device Name The configured device name of the AP, used for identifying the device in an NMS
such as the Cambium Network Services Server (CNSS).

SSID The current configured name/SSID of the AP.

Operating The current frequency carrier used for radio transmission, based on the
Frequency configuration of the Frequency Carrier parameter (in DFS regions, if radar has
been detected, this field may display either DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 or
DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2).

Operating Channel The current channel bandwidth used for radio transmission, based on the
Bandwidth configuration of the Channel Bandwidth parameter.

Transmitter The current operating transmit power of the AP.

Output Power

Antenna Gain The configured gain of the external antenna.

PAGE 4-17
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Country The current configured country code, which has an effect on DFS operation and
transmits power restrictions. Registered Subscriber Modules will inherit this
country code when registration is complete (unless SM is locked to the US
region).

Access Point TDD: The Access Point is operating in point-to-multipoint (PMP) mode using TDD
Mode scheduling. The AP can GPS synchronize in this mode (except when in Flexible
mode).

ePTP Master: The Access Point is operating as a Master in point-to-point mode.

The AP does not support GPS Synchronization in this mode but can provide
significantly lower latency than other modes. QoS (MIR and traffic priority)
capability and Link Quality/Capacity indicators are not available in this mode.

PTP: The Access Point is operating in point-to-point (PTP) mode using TDD
scheduling. The AP can GPS synchronize in this mode (except when in Flexible
mode).

Downlink/Uplink The current configured schedule of downlink traffic to uplink traffic on the radio
Frame Ratio link. In other words, this ratio represents the amount of the total radio link’s
aggregate throughput that will be used for downlink resources and the amount
of the total radio link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for uplink
resources.

Wireless Security Currently configured authentication type used for radio link encryption as well as
SM authentication.

cnMaestro Indicates whether the device is currently configured to be managed by the

Remote Cambium cloud management system – cnMaestro™.
Management

cnMaestro The current management status of the device concerning the Cambium Cloud
Connection Status Server. When Enabled under Configuration->System, the device will be managed
by the Cambium Remote Management System, which allows all Cambium devices
to be managed from the Cambium Cloud Server.

cnMaestro The ID that the device is currently using to be managed by the Cambium Cloud
Account ID Server.

Wireless MAC The MAC address of the device wireless interface.

Address

Ethernet MAC The MAC address of the device Ethernet (LAN) interface.
Address

SFP Port MAC The MAC address of the device SFP interface.
Address

IP Address The currently configured device IP address (LAN) is used for management
access.

PAGE 4-18
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

IPv6 Link Local A link-local address is required for the IPv6-enabled interface (applications may
Address rely on the link-local address even when there is no IPv6 routing). The IPv6 link-
local address is comparable to the auto-configured IPv4 address 169.254.0.0/16.

IPv6 Address The IPv6 address for device management.

Date and Time The current date and time on the device, subject to the configuration of the
parameter Time Zone.

System Uptime The total uptime of the radio since the last reset.

System The current configured system description.

Description

Sync Source Displays the current status of sync timing for the AP.
Status

Device The current configured Latitude and Longitude coordinates in decimal format.
Coordinates

DFS Status N/A: DFS operation is not required for the region configured in parameter
Country Code.

Channel Availability Check: Before transmitting, the device must check the
configured Frequency Carrier for radar pulses for 60 seconds). If no radar pulses
are detected, the device transitions to state In-Service Monitoring.

In-Service Monitoring: Radio is transmitting and receiving normally while

monitoring for radar pulses that require a channel move.

Radar Signal Detected: The receiver has detected a valid radar pulse and is
carrying out detect-and-avoid mechanisms (moving to an alternate channel).

In-Service Monitoring at Alternative Channel: The radio has detected a radar

pulse and has moved the operation to a frequency configured in DFS Alternative
Frequency Carrier 1 or DFS Alternative Frequency Carrier 2.

System Not In Service due to DFS: The radio has detected a radar pulse and has
failed channel availability checks on all alternative frequencies. The non-
occupancy time for the radio frequencies in which radar was detected is 30
minutes.

Ethernet Status Up: The Ethernet (LAN) interface is functioning properly. This also displays the
current port speed and duplex mode to which the Ethernet port has auto
negotiated to or configured.

Down: The Ethernet (LAN) interface is either disconnected or has encountered

an error and is not servicing traffic.

Wireless Status Up: The radio (WAN) interface is functioning properly

Down: The radio (WAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing
traffic.

PAGE 4-19
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

SFP Port Displays the current port speed and duplex mode to which the SFP port has
auto-negotiated or displays the current port speed and duplex mode that have
been configured manually.

SFP Port Type Displays the type of SFP module connected to the device.

Registered The total number of SMs currently registered to the AP.

Subscriber
Modules

Registered The total number of ePMP Elevate (third-party software solution) subscribers
Elevate Subscriber registered to the AP.
Modules

See Using the installation wizard – Access Point on page 4-7 and Using the installation wizard –
Subscriber Module on page 4-12.

Use the Configuration menu to access all applicable device configuration parameters.

Figure 34 Configuration > Radio page (Access Point Mode)

PAGE 4-20
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

The Trial Configuration allows you to try a configuration change without applying the
configuration.

Figure 35 Configuration > Radio page (Subscriber Module Mode)

Table 4-3 Configuration > Radio page attributes

Attribute Description

General

Driver Mode TDD: The device is operating in point-to-multipoint (PMP) mode using TDD
scheduling. The AP can GPS synchronize in this mode.

ePTP Slave: The SM is operating as a Slave in point-to-point mode. The AP and

the system do not support GPS Synchronization in this mode but can provide
significantly lower latency than other modes. QoS (MIR and traffic priority)
capability and Link Quality/Capacity indicators are not available in this mode.

PAGE 4-21
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

TDD PTP: The Access Point is operating in point-to-point (PTP) mode using TDD
scheduling. The AP can GPS synchronize in this mode.

Radio Mode Access Point: The unit controls the point-to-point link and its maintenance. On
startup, the Access Point transmits until a link with the Subscriber Module is
made.

Subscriber Module: The unit listens for its peer and only transmits when the peer
has been identified.

Backward
Enabled: 802.11n ePMP subscribers can register to the AP (requires subscriber
Compatibility
software upgrade).
(Access Point
Disabled: 802.11n ePMP subscribers are not able to register to the AP.
Mode)

Country Defines the country code being used by the device. The country code of the
Subscriber Module follows the country code of the associated Access Point
(Access Point
unless it is an FCC SKU in which case the country code is the United States or
Mode)
Canada. Country code defines the regulatory rules in use for the device.

Range Unit
Units of measurement on the device are displayed in either miles (m) or
(Access Point kilometers (km).
Mode)

Access Point Configuration (Access Point Mode)

Antenna
Sector: Panel, 90° or Dual-Horn, 60°
(Access Point
Omni: KP-5QSOMNI-13
Mode)

SSID SSID is a unique identifier for a wireless LAN which is specified in the Access
(Access Point Point’s beacon. (Access Point Mode). SSID must be the same at both ends and
Mode) different from the site name.

PAGE 4-22
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Max Registrations Based on sector/network planning and subscriber service level implementations,
Allowed this parameter allows setting the maximum number of subscribers that are
allowed to register/gain network entry. The maximum number of subscribers
(Access Point
allowed for each channel bandwidth is as follows:
Mode)
20/40 MHz: 120 subscribers
10 MHz: 60 subscribers
5 MHz: 30 subscribers

The maximum registrations allowed depending on the channel bandwidth of the

current Operating Frequency which can be the primary Frequency Carrier or one
of the alternate Frequency Carriers.

For DFS regions, the maximum number of subscribers is based on the channel
bandwidth of the current operating channel, i.e. Frequency Carrier, Alternate
Frequency Carrier 1, or Alternate Frequency Carrier 2.

The number of Elevate devices that are allowed to register is specified by the
applied license.

Max Range This parameter represents the cell coverage radius. Subscriber Modules outside
the configured radius will not be able to connect. It is recommended to
(Access Point
configure Max Range to match the actual physical distance of the farthest
Mode)
subscriber.

Channel
Bandwidth
Configure the channel size used by the radio for RF transmission.
(Access Point
Mode)

Frequency Carrier Configure the frequency carrier for RF transmission. This list is dynamically
adjusted to the regional restrictions based on the setting of the Country
(Access Point
parameter. Ensure that a thorough spectrum analysis has been completed before
Mode)
configuring this parameter.

Frequency Reuse The Frequency Reuse parameter allows operators to define which APs are co-
located (or within radio range) with other APs. This definition results in an
(Access Point
automatic radio network modification such that self-interference is reduced
Mode)
amongst the co-located sectors.

A network in which two frequencies “F1” and “F2” are reused throughout the
installation is shown in Figure 13.

Please note, while CMM3 and CMM4 devices cannot be used as synchronization
sources for ePMP 3000, the parameter setting suggestions below serve as a
guideline for mixed 802.11n and 802.11ac networks.

PAGE 4-23
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Figure 36 Frequency reuse installation

F1 F1

F2

F2

F2

F2
F1 F1

F2 F2 F2
F1

F1

F1

F1

F1

F1
F2 F2 F2

The set of APs to configure the Frequency Reuse option is dependent on the
GPS synchronization sources in the whole network, CMM3, CMM4, CMM5, or GPS.

0B

In this configuration the GPS synchronization source in the whole network is one
of the following:

• GPS

• CMM4

• CMM5

The rules in selecting the APs to enable the Frequency Reuse in this installation
are:

Only ONE of the APs on the same tower configured with the same frequency
must be configured with the Frequency Reuse Mode parameter set to Back
Sector; the other AP must be configured with Frequency Reuse set to Front
Sector.

Also, APs on different towers facing each other with overlapped coverage must
be configured with Frequency Reuse set to Back Sector.

1B

In this configuration the GPS sync source in the whole network is one of the
following:

• (CMM3 and GPS) or

• (CMM3 and CMM4 / CMM5) or

PAGE 4-24
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

• (CMM3 and CMM4 / CMM5 and GPS)

The rules in selecting the APs to configure Frequency Reuse to Frequency Reuse
to Front Sector or Back Sector in a mixture of sync sources installations are:

Only ONE of the APs on the same tower configured with the same frequency
must have Frequency Reuse set to Back Sector if the sync source of both APs is
the same or the sync is a combination of GPS and CMM4 / CMM5; the other AP
will have the Front Sector ON.

For the APs on different towers facing each other with overlapped coverage:

If both APs have the same sync source, then only ONE of them must have the
Back Sector ON; the other AP shall have the Front Sector ON.

If one AP has GPS as sync source and the other one has CMM4 / CMM5 then only
ONE of them must have Back Sector ON; the other AP shall have Front Sector
ON.

If one AP has GPS or CMM4 / CMM5 as sync source and the other one has CMM3
then:

If the AP with CMM3 sync source has Back Sector ON, then the other AP (with
GPS or CMM4 / CMM5 sync source) must have the Back Sector ON.

If the AP with CMM3 sync source has Frequency Reuse set to Off, then the other
AP (with GPS or CMM4 CMM5 sync source) must have Frequency Reuse set to
Off.

Power Control

Transmitter Output Transmitter Output Power is the total transmit power of the device. The device
Power has four transmit chains and total transmit power sums the power from all
(Access Point chains. This does not include antenna gain. Transmitter Output Power may be
Mode) limited by regulatory rules for the country in use.

Antenna Gain The total gain of the antenna in use by the device.

Subscriber Module
Target Receive Defines the desired received power level at the Access Point from the registered
Level Subscriber Module. Access Points use this parameter to control the transmission
(Access Point power of the Subscriber Module to reduce system self-interference.
Mode)

Network Entry
RSSI Threshold This defines the Downlink RSSI threshold below which a Subscriber Module will
(Subscriber not register to an Access Point.
Module Mode)

Network Entry This defines the Downlink Signal-to-Noise-Ratio (SNR) threshold below which
SNR Threshold the Subscriber Module will not register to an Access Point.

PAGE 4-25
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

(Subscriber
Module Mode)

Synchronization (Access Point Mode)

Co-location Mode Disabled: The ePMP device can synchronize only with other ePMP Access Points.

(Access Point Enabled: The ePMP device can be configured to synchronize with PMP 100 or
Mode) PMP 450 series of radios in addition to other ePMP Access Points. Please refer
to the ePMP and PMP 100 Co-location and Migration Recommendations Guide
for guidance on synchronizing ePMP and PMP 100. Verify that frame size (ms) is
configured equally across the co-located installations.

Synchronization GPS: Synchronization timing is received via the AP’s connected GPS antenna.
Source Co-located or in-range APs receiving synchronization via GPS or CMM transmits
and receive at the same time, thereby reducing self-interference.
(Access Point
Mode) CMM5: Synchronization timing is received via the AP’s Ethernet port via a
connected Cambium Cluster Management Module 5 (CMM5). Co-located or in-
range APs receiving synchronization via GPS or CMM will transmit and receive at
the same time, thereby reducing self-interference. For more information on CMM
configuration, refer to the PMP Synchronization Solutions User Guide.

If a CMM is being used, verify that the cables from the CMM to the network
switch are at most 30 ft (shielded) or 10 ft (unshielded) and that the network
switch is not PoE (802.3af).

Internal: Synchronization timing is generated by the AP and the timing is not

based on GPS pulses.

APs using Synchronization Source of Internal will not transmit and receive in
sync with other co-located or in-range APs, which introduces self-interference
into the system.

Synchronization The Synchronization Holdoff Time is designed to gracefully handle

Holdoff Time fluctuations/losses in the GPS synchronization signaling. After the AP has
received a reliable synchronization pulse for at least 60 seconds, if there is a loss
(Access Point
of synchronization signal, the Synchronization Holdoff timer is started. During
Mode)
the holdoff interval, all SM registrations are maintained. If a valid GPS
synchronization pulse is regained during the holdoff interval, then the AP
continues to operate normally. If a valid synchronization pulse is not regained
from the GPS source during the holdoff interval, then the AP ceases radio
transmission. The default is 30 seconds.

Preferred Access Points (Subscriber Module Mode)

Preferred Access The Preferred Access Points List is comprised of a list of up to 16 Access Point
Points list devices to which the Subscriber Module device sequentially attempts
registration. For each Access Point configured, if authentication is required,
(Subscriber
enter the Wireless Security type and WPA2 Pre-shared Key associated with the
Module Mode)
configured SSID.

PAGE 4-26
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Scheduler (Access Point Mode)

Downlink/Uplink The schedule of downlink traffic to uplink traffic on the radio link. The three
Ratio options, 75/25, 50/50, and 30/70, allow the radio to operate in a fixed ratio on
every frame. In other words, this ratio represents the amount of the total radio
(Access Point
link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for downlink resources, and the
Mode)
amount of the total radio link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for uplink
resources.

Guard interval The purpose of the guard interval is to introduce immunity to propagation
delays, echoes, and reflections, to which digital data is normally very sensitive.
(Access Point
Longer guard periods allow more distant echoes to be tolerated. However,
Mode)
longer guard intervals reduce channel efficiency.

Downlink Max Rate Specifies the maximum downlink MCS value that the Rate Adapt algorithm will
choose for Radio 1. If an installation is exhibiting packet loss due to downlink
(Access Point
interference, modifying Downlink Max Rate to limit the device's maximum MCS
Mode)
rate may result in more reliable packet delivery. This is especially true in
installations among changing and unpredictable interference. Note: This setting
is not available when the AP is set to ePTP Master mode.

Radio Configuration

Max Tx Power Auto: The Access Point can control, using ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power
Control), the TX power of the Subscriber Module up to the maximum capability
(Subscriber
of the Subscriber Module’s transmitter (based on regulatory limits).
Module Mode)
Manual: The Access Point can control the TX power of the Subscriber Module up
to the value configured in the Transmitter Power field.

Transmitter Output The total transmit power of the radio interface. The device has four transmit
Power (Subscriber chains for each channel and total transmit power sums the power from all chains.
Module Mode) This does not include antenna gain. Transmitter Output Power may be limited by
regulatory rules for the country in use.

Uplink Max Rate Specifies the maximum uplink MCS value that the Rate Adapt algorithm will
choose for Radio 1. If an installation is exhibiting packet loss due to uplink
(Subscriber
interference, modifying Uplink Max Rate to limit the device's maximum MCS rate
Module Mode)
may result in more reliable packet delivery. This is especially true in installations
among changing and unpredictable interference. Note: This setting is not
available when the SM is set to ePTP Slave mode.

Scan Channel The selected scan channel bandwidths are scanned by the Subscriber Module.
Bandwidth Any combination may be selected.
When bandwidth is selected, a tab for the bandwidth appears and a listing of all
(Subscriber
available channels is presented once the tab for the bandwidth is selected. Each
Module Mode)
bandwidth tab may contain a number on the left side. This number defines how
many channels have been selected for that bandwidth.
If no channels are selected for bandwidth, then all channels are scanned.

PAGE 4-27
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

AP Quality of Service Page

The ePMP platform supports three QoS priority levels (not available in ePTP Master mode) using air
fairness, priority-based starvation avoidance scheduling algorithm.

Ordering of traffic amongst the priority levels is based on a percentage of total link throughput. In other
words, all priorities receive some throughput so that low priority traffic is not starved from the
transmission. In effect, the greatest amount of throughput is guaranteed to the VOIP priority level, then
High, then Low.

Priority Level ePMP Traffic Priority Label

Highest Priority VOIP (only utilized when VOIP Enable is set to Enabled)

Medium Priority High

Lowest Priority Low

By default, all traffic passed over the air interface is a low priority. The AP’s Quality of Service page may
be utilized to map traffic to certain priority levels using QoS classification rules. The rules included in the
table are enforced starting with the first row of the table.

Each additional traffic classification rule increases device CPU utilization. Careful
network traffic planning is required to efficiently use the device processor.

The ePMP platform also supports radio data rate-limiting (Maximum Information Rate, or MIR) based on
the configuration of the MIR table. Operators may add up to 16 MIR profiles on the AP, each with unique
limits for uplink and downlink data rates. The SM field MIR Profile Setting is used to configure the
appropriate MIR profile for limiting the SM’s data rate.

PAGE 4-28
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 37 Configuration > AP Quality of Service page

Table 4-4 AP Radio Configuration attributes

Attribute Description

Maximum Information Rate (MIR)

MIR Disabled: When disabled, RF transmission is only limited by the

capacity of the link (and any active QoS classification rules).

Enabled: When enabled, all downlink and uplink traffic is limited based
on the profiles configured in the MIR table.

MIR Profiles The MIR (Maximum Information Rate) table is comprised of up to

sixteen profiles which, after configured, may be set on the SM to employ
a certain service level or data rate.

Number Assign a profile number to each row in the AP MIR table. This profile
number is then set on each SM to limit data transfer rates based on the
operator’s configuration of the MIR table and its profiles.

Description Assign a logical description for each service level. For example, a tiered
service-level provider may deploy service levels “Gold”, “Silver” and
“Bronze” or “20 Mbps”, “10 Mbps” and “5 Mbps” to offer a clear
description.

Downlink MIR (kbps) Specify the downlink rate at which the AP is allowed to transmit for this
configured profile.

Uplink MIR (kbps) Specify the uplink rate at which the AP is allowed to transmit for this
configured profile.

Traffic Priority

PAGE 4-29
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Traffic Priority Disabled: No traffic prioritization is performed. All traffic is treated with
equal priority (low priority).

Enabled: Traffic prioritization is enabled, and specific types of traffic

can be prioritized using the fields below.

VoIP Priority Enabled: When enabled, two entries are automatically added to the first
and second rows of the QoS Classification Rules table, one with Rule
Type CoS (5) and one with Rule Type DSCP (46). The addition of these
rules ensures that VoIP traffic passed over the radio downlink is given
the highest priority. The CoS and DSCP values may be modified to
accommodate non-standard VoIP equipment.

Disabled: When disabled, VoIP traffic is scheduled normally along with

all other user data.

Broadcast Priority Low Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized
as low priority and is delivered to the SM after scheduled high priority
and VoIP traffic.

High Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized
as a high priority and is scheduled for delivery to SMs before low priority
traffic but after VoIP traffic.

Multicast Priority Low Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized as
low priority and will be delivered to the SM after scheduled high priority
and VoIP traffic.

High Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized as
a high priority and is scheduled for delivery to SMs before low priority
traffic but after VoIP traffic.

QoS Classification Rules The QoS Classification Rules table contains all of the rules enforced by
the device when passing traffic over the radio downlink. Traffic passed
through the device is matched against each rule in the table; when a
match is made the traffic is sent over the radio link using the priority
defined in column Traffic Priority.

PAGE 4-30
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Type CoS: Class of Service; traffic prioritization is based on the 3-bit header
present in the 802.1Q VLAN-tagged Ethernet frame header in the packet
entering the AP’s Ethernet port.

VLAN ID: traffic prioritization is based on the VLAN ID of the packet

entering the AP’s Ethernet port.

EtherType: traffic prioritization is based on the two-octet Ethertype

field in the Ethernet frame entering the AP’s Ethernet port. The
Ethertype is used to identify the protocol of the data in the payload of
the Ethernet frame.

IP: traffic prioritization is based on the source and (or) destination IP

address of the packet entering the AP’s Ethernet port. A subnet mask
may be included to define a range of IP addresses to match.

MAC: traffic prioritization is based on the source and (or) destination

MAC address of the packet entering the AP’s Ethernet port. A mask may
be included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is
made up of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and
0s that end the mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is
allowed, but FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined
with the mask to define the range of allowed MAC addresses.

Details Represents the details of the Class of Service (CoS) present in the
packet entering the AP’s Ethernet port.

Priority Represents the QoS classification rule priority.

The ePMP platform supports three QoS priority levels (not available in ePTP Master mode) using air
fairness, priority-based starvation avoidance scheduling algorithm.

Ordering of traffic amongst the priority levels is based on a percentage of total link throughput. In other
words, all priorities receive some throughput so that low priority traffic is not starved from the
transmission. In effect, the greatest amount of throughput is guaranteed to the VOIP priority level, then
High, then Low.

Priority Level ePMP Traffic Priority Label

Highest Priority VOIP (only utilized when VOIP Enable is set to Enabled)

Medium Priority High

Lowest Priority Low

By default, all traffic passed over the air interface is a low priority. The SM’s Quality of Service page may
be utilized to map traffic to certain priority levels using QoS classification rules. The rules included in the
table are enforced starting with the first row of the table.

PAGE 4-31
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Each additional traffic classification rule increases device CPU utilization. Careful
network traffic planning is required to efficiently use the device processor.

The ePMP platform also supports radio data rate-limiting (Maximum Information Rate, or MIR) based on
the configuration of the MIR table. Operators may add up to 16 MIR profiles on the AP, each with unique
limits for uplink and downlink data rates. The SM field MIR Profile Setting is used to configure the
appropriate MIR profile for limiting the SM’s data rate.

Figure 38 Configuration > SM Quality of Service page

Table 4-5 SM Quality of Service attributes

Attribute Description

Maximum Information Rate (MIR)

MIR Profile Number Configure the desired MIR (Maximum Information Rate) profile for SM
operation. This profile must be configured on the AP else the default profile
(0) is used.

Traffic Priority Enabled: The QoS Classification Rules table is editable and is utilized by the
device to classify traffic.

Disabled: The QoS Classification Rules table is greyed out and all traffic is
sent at one priority level.

PAGE 4-32
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

VoIP Priority Enabled: When enabled, two entries are automatically added to the first
and second rows of the QoS Classification Rules table, one with Rule Type
CoS (5) and one with Rule Type DSCP (46). The addition of these rules
ensures that VoIP traffic passed over the radio downlink is given the highest
priority. The CoS and DSCP values may be modified to accommodate non-
standard VoIP equipment.

Broadcast Priority Low Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as low
priority and is delivered to the AP after scheduled high priority and VoIP
traffic.

High Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as a
high priority and is scheduled for delivery to the AP before low priority
traffic but after VoIP traffic.

Multicast Priority Low Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as low
priority and is delivered to the AP after scheduled high priority and VoIP
traffic.

High Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as a high
priority and is scheduled for delivery to the AP before low priority traffic but
after VoIP traffic.

Subscriber Module Normal: SM gives priority to the packets as defined in the rules which could
Priority be "Low", "High", or "VoIP". "Normal" priority will allow data to be added to
the appropriate "High", "Low", and "VoIP" queues based on the QoS rules.
This is the default setting. If no rule is defined for a packet, then the packet
priority will be “Low”.

High: SM places all data other than VoIP in the "High" queue. It will be given
higher priority than SMs configured with “Low” and “Normal” when there is
contention for bandwidth under the AP.

Low: "Low" priority will place all data that is not VoIP in the "Low" priority
queue. It will be given lower priority than SMs configured with “High” when
there is contention for bandwidth under the same AP.
"VoIP" queue is the highest priority queue followed by the "High" queue and then
by the "Low" queue. Higher priority queues have preference over lower priority
queues but will not starve them.
QoS Classification The QoS Classification Rules table contains all of the rules enforced by the
Rules device when passing traffic over the radio downlink. Traffic passed through
the device is matched against each rule in the table; when a match is made
the traffic is sent over the radio link using the priority defined in column
Traffic Priority.

PAGE 4-33
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Type DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point; traffic prioritization is based on

the 6-bit Differentiated Services field in the IP header present in the packet
entering the Ethernet port.

CoS: Class of Service; traffic prioritization is based on the 3-bit header

present in the 802.1Q VLAN-tagged Ethernet frame header in the packet
entering the SM’s Ethernet port.

VLAN ID: Traffic prioritization is based on the VLAN ID of the packet

entering the SM’s Ethernet port.

EtherType: Traffic prioritization is based on a 2 octet Ethertype field in the

Ethernet frame entering the SM’s Ethernet port. The Ethertype is used to
identify the protocol of the data in the payload of the Ethernet frame.

IP: Traffic prioritization is based on the source and/or destination IP

addresses of the packet entering the SM’s Ethernet port. A subnet mask may
be included to define a range of IP addresses to match.

MAC: Traffic prioritization is based on the source and/or destination MAC

addresses of the packet entering the SM’s Ethernet port. A mask may be
included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is made up
of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and 0s that end the
mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus, FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is allowed, but
FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined with the mask to
define the range of allowed MAC addresses.

Details The Rule Details column is used to further configure each classification rule
specified in column Rule Type.

Priority High: Traffic entering the SM’s Ethernet port is prioritized as “high priority”
for sending over the radio link (traffic will be sent after VOIP-classified
traffic but before Low-classified traffic).

Low: Traffic entering the SM’s Ethernet port is prioritized as “low priority”
for sending over the radio link (traffic will be sent after VOIP-classified and
High-classified traffic is sent).

PAGE 4-34
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 39 Configuration > System page parameters

Table 4-6 Configuration > System page attributes

Attribute Description

General

Device Name The configured identifier is used in an NMS such as cnMaestro.

Display Device Name Disabled: For security, the configured Device Name is hidden on the device
Before Login login screen.

Enabled: The configured Device Name is displayed upper-left on the device

login screen.

Inactive Logout Disabled: The device will not automatically log out users after a period of
inactivity.

Enabled: After the period configured in the Inactive Logout Period has
elapsed, the device will automatically log out the user.

PAGE 4-35
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Inactive Logout Represents the amount of time for which a user will remain logged in. After
Period this period has elapsed, the user will be automatically logged out.

Web-page Auto Configure the interval for which the device retrieves system statistics for
Update display on the management interface. For example, if this setting is configured
to 5 seconds, the statistics and status parameters displayed on the
management interface will be refreshed every 5 seconds (default).

Webpage Auto Update is a session-only configuration change. It is updated

with the <Enter> key and is not savable when using the save button.

Range Unit Units of measurement on the device are displayed in either miles (m) or
kilometers (km).

Web Access HTTP: The device's web management interface is accessed via HTTP.

HTTPS: The device's web management interface may only be accessed via
secure HTTPS.

HTTP Port This specifies the TCP/UDP port to be used with HTTP or HTTPS. The default
value for HTTP is 80 and HTTPS is 443.

SSH Access Disabled: Access to the device through SSH is not possible.

Enabled: Cambium engineers can access the device through SSH which
enables them to log in to the radio and troubleshoot. SSH Access is Enabled
by default.

Telnet Access Disabled: Command Line Interface access via Telnet is not allowed

Enabled: Command Line Interface access via Telnet is allowed

Network Time Protocol (NTP)

NTP Server IP Static: The device retrieves NTP time data from the servers configured in
Assignment fields NTP Server IP Address.

DHCP: The device retrieves NTP time data from the server IP issued via a
network DHCP server.

Preferred NTP Server Configure the primary NTP server IP addresses from which the device will
retrieve time and date information.

Alternate NTP Server Configure alternate or secondary NTP server IP addresses from which the
device retrieves time and date information.

Time Zone The Time Zone option may be used to offset the received NTP time to match
the operator’s local time zone.

Location Services

On-board GPS GPS-retrieved Latitude information for the device in decimal format.
Latitude

On-board GPS GPS-retrieved Longitude information for the device in decimal format.
Longitude

PAGE 4-36
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

On-board GPS Height GPS-retrieved height information for the device in meters.

Use GPS Coordinates Click Update to retrieve device location and height information via the
connected GPS source.

Device Latitude Configure Latitude information for the device in decimal format.

Device Longitude Configure Longitude information for the device in decimal format.

Device Height Configure height above sea level for the device in meters.

Device Location Hyperlink to display the device location in Google Maps

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Read-Only Specify a control string that can allow a Network Management Station (NMS)
Community String to read SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. This password
will never authenticate an SNMP user or an NMS to read/write access.

The Read-only Community String value is clear text and is readable by a

packet monitor.

Read-Write Specify a control string that can allow a Network Management Station (NMS)
Community String to access SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string.

System Name Specify a string to associate with the physical module. This parameter can be
polled by the NMS. Special characters are supported.

System Description Specify a description string to associate with the physical module. This
parameter can be polled by the NMS. Special characters are supported.

System Location Specify a description string to associate with the physical location. This
parameter can be polled by the NMS. Special characters are supported.

Traps Disabled: SNMP traps for system events are not sent from the device.

Enabled: SNMP traps for system events are sent to the servers configured in
table Trap Servers.

Trap Community Configure an SNMP Trap Community String which is processed by the servers
String configured in Trap Servers. This string is used by the trap server to decide
whether or not to process the traps incoming from the device (i.e. for traps to
successfully be received by the trap server, the community string must match).

System Logging (Syslog)

Server 1-4 Specify up to four Syslog servers to which the device sends Syslog messages.

Syslog Mask Configure the levels of Syslog messages which the devices send to the servers
configured in parameters Server 1-4.

PAGE 4-37
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Caution

Choose only the Syslog levels appropriate for your installation. Excessive
logging can cause the device log file to fill and begin overwriting previous
entries.

cnMaestro

Remote Management When Enabled, the device will be managed by cnMaestro - the Cambium
Remote Management System, which allows all Cambium devices to be
managed in the cloud.

cnMaestro URL Configure the URL of cnMaestro. The default value is

https://cloud.cambiumnetworks.com.

Cambium ID Configure the Cambium ID that the device will use for onboarding on to
cnMaestro.

Onboarding Key Configure the password/key associated with the Cambium-ID that the device
will use for onboarding on to cnMaestro.

Account Management

The Administrator account has full read and write permissions for the device.

Administrator Disabled: The disabled user is not granted access to the device management
Account interface. The administrator user level cannot be disabled.

Enabled: The user is granted access to the device management interface.

Username The username associated with the administrator account is used upon device
login.

Password Configure a custom password to secure the device. Only the ‘Administrator’
account can override this password. The password character display may be

toggled using the visibility icon .

The Installer account has permissions to read and write parameters applicable
to unit installation and monitoring.

Installer Account Disabled: The disabled user is not granted access to the device management
interface.

Enabled: The user is granted access to the device management interface.

Username The username associated with the installer account used upon device login.

Password Configure a custom password to secure the device. Only the ‘Administrator’
account can override this password. The password character display may be

toggled using the visibility icon .

The Home User account has permission to access pertinent information for
Home User Account
support purposes.

PAGE 4-38
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Disabled: The disabled user is not granted access to the device management
interface.

Enabled: The user is granted access to the device management interface.

Username The username associated with the home user account is used upon device
login.

Password Configure a custom password to secure the device. Only the ‘Administrator’
account can override this password. The password character display may be

toggled using the visibility icon .

The Read-Only account has permission to view the Monitor page only.

Disabled: The disabled user is not granted access to the device management
Read-Only Account
interface.

Enabled: The user is granted access to the device management interface.

Username The username associated with the read-only account used upon device login.

Password Configure a custom password to secure the device. Only the ‘Administrator’
account can override this password. The password character display may be

toggled using the visibility icon .

Figure 40 Configuration > Network page (Access Point Mode)

PAGE 4-39
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 41 Configuration > Network page (Subscriber Module Mode, Bridge Network Mode)

PAGE 4-40
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 42 Configuration > Network page (Subscriber Module Mode, NAT Network Mode)

PAGE 4-41
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 43 Configuration > Network page (Subscriber Module Mode, Router Mode)

Table 4-7 Configuration > Network page attributes

Attribute Description

General

Network Mode NAT: The SM acts as a router and packets are forwarded or filtered based on
their IP header (source or destination).

Bridge: The SM acts as a switch and packets are forwarded or filtered based
on their MAC destination address.

Router: The SM acts as a router and packets are forwarded or filtered based on
their IP header (source or destination) using specific static routes and IP
aliases configured by the operator.

PAGE 4-42
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

IP Assignment Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields IP

Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS
Server.

DHCP: Device management IP addressing (IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,

and DNS Server) is assigned via a network DHCP server, and parameters IP
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS
Server are not configurable.

Wireless IP Static: Wireless IP address is configured manually in fields Wireless IP

Assignment Address, Wireless IP Subnet Mask, Wireless Gateway IP Address, Preferred
DNS IP Address, and Alternate DNS IP Address.
(NAT Mode, Router
Mode) DHCP: Device management IP addressing (Wireless IP address, Wireless
Subnet mask, Wireless Gateway, and DNS server) is assigned via a network
DHCP server.

IP Address Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet
protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network.
Wireless IP Address
(NAT Mode, Router If IP Address Assignment is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP
Mode) address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to fallback IP
192.168.0.1 (Access Point) or 192.168.0.2 (Subscriber Module).

Subnet Mask
Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if Device
Wireless IP Address IP Address (LAN) is configured to 192.168.2.1 and IP Subnet Mask (LAN) is
(NAT Mode, Router configured to 255.255.255.0, the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X.
Mode)

Gateway
Configure the IP address of the device on the current network that acts as a
Wireless Gateway gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other
(NAT Mode, Router networks.
Mode)

Preferred DNS Server Configure the primary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution.

Alternate DNS Server Configure the secondary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution.

IPv6 Assignment IPv6 Assignment specifies how the IPv6 address is obtained.

Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields IPv6

Address and IPv6 Gateway.

DHCPv6: Device management IP addressing (IP address and gateway) is

assigned via a network DHCP server, and parameters IPv6 Address and IPv6
Gateway are unused. If the DHCPv6 server is not available previous static IPv6
address will be used as a fallback IPv6 address. If no previous static IPv6
address is available, no IPv6 address will be assigned. DHCPv6 will occur over
the wireless interface by default.

IPv6 Address Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) address. This address is used by the family
of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network.

PAGE 4-43
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

IPv6 addresses are represented by eight groups of four hexadecimal digits

separated by colons.

IPv6 Gateway Configure the IPv6 address of the device on the current network that acts as a
gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other
networks.

Ethernet Port Security Disabled: No MAC address limit/gaining timers are imposed for bridging at the
(Subscriber Module Subscriber Module device Ethernet port.
Mode)
Enabled: By configuring Secure MAC Limit and MAC Aging Time, a limit is
imposed on the number and duration of bridged devices connected to the
Subscriber Module Ethernet port.

Secure MAC Limit

Configure the number of simultaneous secure MAC addresses that will be
(Subscriber Module allowed at the Ethernet interface of the Subscriber Module
Mode)

MAC Aging Time Configure the time for which the secure MAC addresses should be allowed to
age. Once the Aging timer expires for a MAC address, it will be removed from
(Subscriber Module
the internal table and no longer count as an active MAC. Set the time to 0 to
Mode)
disable aging.

Ethernet Interface (Subscriber Module NAT Mode, Router Mode)

IP Address Ethernet interface Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the
family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network.
(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if Device
IP Address (LAN) is configured to 192.168.2.1 and IP Subnet Mask (LAN) is
(Subscriber Module
configured to 255.255.255.0, the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X.
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

DHCP Server Disabled: Use this setting when SM is in NAT or Router mode if there is an
existing DHCP Server below the SM handing out IP Addresses or if all devices
(Subscriber Module
below the SM will be configured with static IP Addresses.
NAT Mode, Router
Mode) Enabled: Use this setting when SM is in NAT or Router mode, to use the SM’s
local/onboard DHCP server to hand out IP addresses to its clients.

DHCP Start IP Configure the first address which will be issued to a DHCP client. Upon
additional DHCP requests, the DHCP Start IP is incremented until the local
(Subscriber Module
DHCP End IP is reached.
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

DHCP End IP Configure the highest IP address in the DHCP pool that can be issued to a
DHCP client.

PAGE 4-44
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

Preferred DHCP DNS Configure the primary DNS Server IP address which will be used to configure
Server DHCP clients (if local DHCP Server is set to Enabled).

(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

Alternate DHCP DNS Configure the secondary DNS Server IP address which will be used to
Server configure DHCP clients (if local DHCP Server is set to Enabled).

(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

DHCP Lease Time Configure the time for which a DHCP IP address is leased. When the lease time
expires, the DHCP client must renew IP addresses via DHCP request.
(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet: Used for Encapsulating PPP frames
inside Ethernet frames.

Service Name Optional entry to set a specific service name to connect to for the PPPoE
session. If this is left blank the SM accepts the first service option that comes
back from the Access Concentrator specified below, if any. This is limited to 32
characters.

Access Concentrator An optional entry to set a specific Access Concentrator to connect to for the
PPPoE session. If this is blank, the SM accepts the first Access Concentrator
which matches the service name (if specified). This is limited to 32 characters.

Static Routes (Subscriber Module Router Mode)

Static Routes When Enabled, it allows the operator to create static routes that will apply to
both the Wireless and Ethernet interface of the SM.
(Subscriber Module
Router Mode) This allows operators to configure a custom table of explicit paths between
networks. Static routing is often used as a method to reduce the overhead of
processing dynamic routes through a network when the specific path is known
(or, it is simpler to define a specific path). Static routing is also used as a
backup when dynamic routing protocols fail to complete a route from one
network to another.

In router mode, the Static Routes table is referenced by the SM to

forward/filter packets to a particular destination configured by the user based
on the IP addressing information contained in the table.

PAGE 4-45
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Since static routes do not change with network changes, it is recommended to

only use static routes for simple network paths that are not prone to frequent
changes (requiring updates to the routes configured on the ePMP SM).

It is important to consider each hop in a static route’s path to ensure that the
routing equipment has been configured to statically or dynamically route
packets to the proper destination. Otherwise, network communication will fail.

Network Address Translation (NAT) is not performed when the SM is in Router

mode.

Target Network IP Configure the target subnet/network’s IP address to which the SM should
route the packets.
(Subscriber Module
Router Mode)

Subnet Mask Configure the subnet mask for the Target Network IP address.

(Subscriber Module
Router Mode)

Gateway Configure the gateway to which packets that match the Target Network IP
Address and Subnet Mask are sent.
(Subscriber Module
Router Mode)

Description Provide a description to easily identify the static route and its purpose.

(Subscriber Module
Router Mode)

IP Aliases (Subscriber Module Router Mode)

IP Aliases When Enabled, IP aliases allow the operator to associate more than one IP
address to the Ethernet interface of the SM.
(Subscriber Module
Router Mode) This configuration of multiple IP addresses for the SM’s Ethernet interface
allows connections to multiple networks, often used as a mechanism for
management access to the device from a convenient networking path.

IP Address Configure the IP address for the alias.

(Subscriber Module
Router Mode)

Subnet Mask Configure the subnet mask for the alias.

(Subscriber Module
Router Mode)

Description Provide a description to easily identify the IP alias and its purpose/connected
network.
(Subscriber Module
Router Mode)

Separate Wireless Management Interface (Subscriber Module NAT Mode, Router Mode)

PAGE 4-46
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Separate Disabled: When disabled, the Wireless IP is the management interface for the
Management IP SM.

(Subscriber Module Enabled: When enabled, the IP Address below is the management interface
NAT Mode, Router for the SM.
Mode)

IP Assignment Static: Separate Wireless Management Interface is configured manually in

fields IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway.
(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode, Router DHCP: Management IP addressing (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and
Mode) DNS Server) is assigned via a network DHCP server.

IP Address Configure the IP address that will be used to access the SM’s management
interface when in NAT mode. The Wireless IP (public IP) will not allow
(Subscriber Module
management access.
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if the IP
Address is configured to 192.168.2.1 and Subnet Mask is configured to
(Subscriber Module
255.255.255.0, the device wireless interface will belong to the subnet
NAT Mode, Router
192.168.2.X.
Mode)

Gateway Configure the IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a
gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other
(Subscriber Module
networks.
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

Separate Enabled: A VLAN configuration establishes a logical group within the network.
Management VLAN Each computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location,
has access to the same data based on the VLAN architecture. For the network
(Subscriber Module
operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler
NAT Mode, Router
management, and enhanced security. When the SM is in NAT mode, the
Mode)
Separate Wireless Management VLAN configuration applies to management
data.

Disabled: When disabled, the SM does not have a unique management VLAN.

VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include the device’s management traffic on a

separate VLAN network.
(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

VLAN Priority ePMP radios can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities described
in the IEEE 802.1p specification. Data VLAN Priority represents the VLAN
(Subscriber Module
Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization field to
NAT Mode, Router
give precedence to the device’s management data.
Mode)

PAGE 4-47
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

This parameter only takes effect if the Separate Wireless Management VLAN
parameter is enabled. Configure this parameter to set the value of the Priority
code point field in the 802.1q tag for management traffic on the configured
VLAN ID originating from the SM. The default value is 0.

Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)

Management VLAN Enabled: The AP management interface can be assigned to a Management

VLAN to separate management traffic (remote module management via SNMP
(Access Point Mode)
or HTTP) from user traffic (such as internet browsing, voice, or video. Once the
management interface is enabled for a VLAN, an AP’s management interface
can be accessed only by packets tagged with a VLAN ID matching the
management VLAN ID.

A VLAN configuration establishes a logical group within the network. Each

computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has
access to the same data based on the VLAN architecture. For the network
operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler
management, and enhanced security.

Disabled: When disabled, all IP management traffic is allowed to the device.

VLAN (Management + Enabled: The device management interface can be assigned to a Management
Data) VLAN to separate management traffic (remote module management via SNMP
or HTTP) from user traffic (such as internet browsing, voice, or video. Once the
(Subscriber Module
management interface is enabled for a VLAN, the management interface can
Mode)
be accessed only by packets tagged with a VLAN ID matching the
management VLAN ID.

A VLAN configuration establishes a logical group within the network. Each

computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has
access to the same data based on the VLAN architecture. For the network
operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler
management, and enhanced security.

Disabled: When disabled, all IP management traffic is allowed to the device.

VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include the device’s management traffic on a

separate VLAN network.
(NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

VLAN Priority ePMP radios can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities described
in the IEEE 802.1p specification. Data VLAN Priority represents the VLAN
(NAT Mode, Router
Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization field to
Mode)
give precedence to the device management data.

This parameter only takes effect if the Separate Wireless Management VLAN
parameter is enabled. Configure this parameter to set the value of the Priority
code point field in the 802.1q tag for management traffic on the configured
VLAN ID originating from the SM. The default value is 0.

PAGE 4-48
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Management VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include the device’s management traffic on a
separate VLAN network. For example, if Management VLAN ID is set to 2, GUI
(Access Point Mode)
access will only be allowed from frames tagged with VLAN ID 2. This
(Subscriber Module parameter only takes effect if the MGMT VLAN parameter is enabled.
Bridge Mode)

Management VLAN ePMP devices can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities
Priority described in the IEEE 802.1p specification. Management VLAN Priority
represents the VLAN Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use
(Access Point Mode)
this prioritization field to give precedence to the device management traffic.
(Subscriber Module
This parameter only takes effect if the Management VLAN parameter is
Bridge Mode)
enabled. Configure this parameter to set the value of the Priority code point
field in the 802.1q tag for traffic on the management VLAN originating from
the Subscriber Module. The default value is 0.

Data VLAN Enabled: A VLAN tag will be added to all untagged traffic entering the Salve
device LAN port before sending it to the Access Point and remove tags in the
(Subscriber Module
opposite direction from traffic (tagged with Data VLAN ID) entering on the
Mode)
Subscriber Module device WAN port before sending to the Subscriber Module
(Bridge Mode) device LAN port.

Disabled: When disabled, no changes are made to untagged traffic passing

through the Subscriber Module device.

Data VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include this VLAN tag to all untagged traffic
entering on the Subscriber Module device LAN port before sending it to the
(Subscriber Module
Access Point device and remove tags in the opposite direction from traffic
Mode)
(tagged with Data VLAN ID) entering on the Subscriber Module device WAN
(Bridge Mode) port before sending to the Subscriber Module device LAN port.

Data VLAN Priority ePMP devices can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities
described in the IEEE 802.1p specification. Data VLAN Priority represents the
(Subscriber Module
VLAN Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization
Mode)
field to give precedence to device user data.
(Bridge Mode)
This parameter only takes effect if the Data VLAN parameter is enabled.
Configure this parameter to set the value of the Priority code point field in the
802.1q tag for traffic on the Data VLAN originating from the Subscriber Module
device. The default value is 0.

Membership VLAN Configure the Membership VLAN Table to include the SM in one or more
VLANs. When the SM receives a packet tagged from either the Ethernet (LAN)
(Subscriber Module
or Wireless (WAN) side with a VLAN ID which is contained in the Membership
Bridge Mode)
VLAN Table, the packet is forwarded and sent out to the other interface. When
the SM receives a packet tagged with a VLAN ID that is not present in the
Membership VLAN Table, the frame is dropped (assuming there is at least one
VLAN ID present in the Membership VLAN table or configured as a Data
VLAN).

PAGE 4-49
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

VLAN Mapping Configure the VLAN Mapping Table to map the C-VLAN of traffic ingressing
the Ethernet (LAN) port of the SM to an S-VLAN before being forwarded to
(Subscriber Module
the air interface on the UL. In the DL direction, the SM will automatically un-
Bridge Mode)
map the S-VLAN to the C-VLAN before forwarding the tagged packets to the
Ethernet (LAN) interface of the SM.

C-VLAN Configure the C-VLAN ID of the tagged traffic for which the mapping needs to
occur.
(Subscriber Module
Bridge Mode) The C-VLAN ID must be entered in the SM VLAN Membership VLAN table.

S-VLAN Configure the S-VLAN ID to which the tagged traffic needs to be mapped.

(Subscriber Module The S-VLAN ID must be entered in the SM VLAN Membership VLAN table.
Bridge Mode)

Ethernet Port

Ethernet MTU Specify the device MTU or Maximum Transmission Unit; the size in bytes of the
largest data unit that the device is configured to process. Larger MTU
configurations can enable the network to operate with greater efficiency, but
in the case of retransmissions due to packet errors, efficiency is reduced since
large packets must be resent in the event of an error.

Ethernet Port Disabled: The primary Ethernet port is disabled (a mechanism for restricting
access for non-payment).
(Subscriber Module
Mode) Enabled: The primary Ethernet port is enabled.

Port Setting Allows the Gigabit Ethernet port duplex settings and port speed to be either
manually configured or auto-negotiate with the connected Ethernet device on
the other end of the link.
Guidelines for using Port Setting:

When auto-negotiation is turned on, this applies to both Port Speed and Port
Duplex Mode.

If the other end of the Ethernet connection supports auto-negotiation, then

Auto-Negotiate should be selected.

If the other end of the Ethernet connection does not support auto-negotiation,
then Manual should be selected and both ends of the link should manually set
the port speed and port duplex mode.

Port Speed With Port Setting configured to Manual, the Gigabit Ethernet port speed can
be forced to 1000 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 10 Mbps.

Port Duplex Mode With Port Setting configured to Manual, the Gigabit Ethernet port duplex
mode can be forced to Full or Half.

Port Forwarding (Subscriber Module Mode) (NAT Mode)

PAGE 4-50
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

UPnP IGD Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a set of networking protocols that permits
networked devices, such as personal computers, printers, Internet gateways,
(Subscriber Module
Wi-Fi access points, and mobile devices to seamlessly discover each other's
Mode)
presence on the network and establish functional network services for data
(NAT Mode) sharing, communications, and entertainment. UPnP is intended primarily for
residential networks without enterprise-class devices. With UPnP IGD and PCP
protocols, ePMP will support explicit dynamic port mappings.

Enable UPnP IGD (Internet Gateway Device) to allow the ePMP device to use
the IGD profile for UPnP support.

NAT PMP (PCP) The PCP (Port Control Protocol) allows an IPv6 or IPv4 host to control how
incoming IPv6 or IPv4 packets are translated and forwarded by a Network
(Subscriber Module
Address Translator (NAT) or simple firewall, and also allows a host to optimize
Mode)
its outgoing NAT keepalive messages. PCP was standardized as a successor to
(NAT Mode) the NAT Port Mapping Protocol (NAT-PMP), with which it shares similar
protocol concepts and packet formats.

Enable this parameter to allow the ePMP device to use the PCP protocol for
UPnP support.

Data Port Forwarding The Data Port Forwarding Table is used to define which range of wireless ports
are forwarded to a LAN (SM local network) IP address below the SM.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(NAT Mode)

Protocol UDP: Packet forwarding decisions are based on UDP packets.

(Subscriber Module TCP: Packet forwarding decisions are based on TCP packets.
Mode)

(NAT Mode)

Port Begin Configure the beginning of the range of wireless ports to match for forwarding
to LAN IP.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(NAT Mode)

Port End Configure the end of the range of wireless ports to match for forwarding to
LAN IP.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(NAT Mode)

Forwarding IP Configure the LAN IP of the device situated below the SM which receives the
packets forwarded based on the Separate Management IP Port Forwarding
(Subscriber Module
Table configuration.
Mode)

(NAT Mode)

PAGE 4-51
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Mapped Port Configure the port of the device situated below the SM which receives the
packets forwarded based on the Data Port Forwarding Table configuration.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(NAT Mode)

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) (Subscriber Module Mode) (NAT Mode, Router Mode)

PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet: Used for encapsulating PPP frames
inside Ethernet frames.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(NAT Mode, Router

Mode)

Service Name Optional entry to set a specific service name to connect to for the PPPoE
session. If this is left blank the SM accepts the first service option that comes
(Subscriber Module
back from the Access Concentrator specified below, if any. This is limited to 32
Mode)
characters.
(NAT Mode, Router
Mode)

Access Concentrator Optional entry to set a specific Access Concentrator to connect to for the
PPPoE session. If this is blank, the SM accepts the first Access Concentrator
(Subscriber Module
which matches the service name (if specified). This is limited to 32 characters.
Mode)

(NAT Mode, Router

Mode)

Authentication ALL: This means that CHAP authentication will be attempted first, then PAP
authentication. The same password is used for both types.
(Subscriber Module
Mode) CHAP: This means that CHAP authentication will be attempted.

(NAT Mode, Router PAP: This means that PAP authentication will be attempted.
Mode)

Username This is the CHAP/PAP username that is used. This is limited to 32 characters.

(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(NAT Mode, Router

Mode)

Password This is the CHAP/PAP password that is used. This is limited to 32 characters.

(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(NAT Mode, Router

Mode)

PAGE 4-52
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

MTU Size Maximum Transmission Unit; the size in bytes of the largest data unit that the
device is configured to process inside the PPPoE tunnel. This field allows the
(Subscriber Module
operator to specify the largest MTU value to use in the PPPoE session if PPPoE
Mode)
MSS Clamping is Enabled. The user will be able to enter an MTU value up to
(NAT Mode, Router 1492. However, if the MTU determined in LCP negotiations is less than this
Mode) user-specified value, the SM uses the smaller value as its MTU for the PPPoE
link.

Keep Alive Time Configure the Keep Alive Time to allow the radio to keep the PPPoE session up
after establishment. As an example, if this field is set to 5, the PPPoE client will
(Subscriber Module
send a keep-alive message to the PPPoE server every 5 seconds. If there is no
Mode)
acknowledgment, it sends the ‘Keep alive’ message to the server 4 more times
(NAT Mode, Router (for a total of 5 times) before tearing down the PPPoE session. Setting this to
Mode) 12 will mean the keep-alive message will be sent every 12 seconds and when
there is no acknowledgment, the client will try for a total of 12 times every 12
seconds before tearing down the PPPoE session.

MSS Clamping Disabled: The SM PPPoE session allows any MTU size determined by other
devices in the PPPoE session during the LCP negotiations.
(Subscriber Module
Mode) Enabled: The SM PPPoE session enforces a max MTU size determined by the
PPPoE MTU Size setting for all devices in the PPPoE session during the LCP
(NAT Mode, Router
negotiations unless one of the devices enforces an MTU setting that is smaller
Mode)
in value.

SFP Port (Access Point Mode)

SFP Port Disabled: The SFP port is inactive.

(Access Point Mode) Enabled: The SFP port is active.

Advanced

IPv6 Support System-wide IPv6 Protocol Support. When enabled, appropriate IPv6 modules
and services will be loaded.

Spanning Tree Disabled: When disabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is
Protocol disabled at the Access Point.

Enabled: When enabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is

enabled at the Access Point, allowing for the prevention of Ethernet bridge
loops.

DHCP Server Below Disabled: This blocks DHCP servers connected to the Subscriber Module
Subscriber Module device LAN side from handing out IP addresses to DHCP clients above the
Subscriber Module device (wireless side).
(Subscriber Module
Mode) Enabled: This allows DHCP servers connected to the Subscriber Module
device LAN side to assign IP addresses to DHCP clients above the Subscriber
Module device (wireless side). This configuration is typical in PTP links.

PAGE 4-53
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Management Access Ethernet: Only allow access to the Access Point’s web management interface
(Access Point Mode) via a local Ethernet (LAN) connection. In this configuration, the Access Point’s
web management interface may not be accessed from over the air (i.e. from a
device situated below the Subscriber Module).

Ethernet and Wireless: Allow access to the Access Point’s web management
interface via a local Ethernet (LAN) connection and from over the air (i.e. from
a device situated below the Subscriber Module).

Access Points configured with Management Access Interface set to Ethernet

and Ethernet and Wireless are susceptible to unauthorized access.

SM Traffic Isolation Disabled: This is the default mode. When SM isolation is disabled, an SM can
communicate with another SM, when both the SMs are associated with the
(Access Point Mode)
same Access Point (AP).

Enabled: When the SM Isolation feature is Enabled, an SM is unable to

communicate with another SM (peer-to-peer traffic) when both the SMs are
associated with the same Access Point (AP). This feature essentially enables
the AP to drop the packets to avoid peer-to-peer traffic scenarios.

DHCP Option 82 Disabled: The device does not insert the "remote-id" (option ID 0x2) and the
(Access Point Mode) "circuit-id" (ID 0x01). DHCP Option 82 is ‘Disabled’ by default.

Enabled: The device inserts “remote-id” (option ID 0×2) to be the Subscriber

Module MAC address and the “circuit-id” (ID 0×01) to be the Access Point’s
MAC address. Those two fields are used to identify the remote device and
connection from which the DHCP request was received.

LLDP The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral link layer
protocol (as specified in IEEE 802.1AB) used by ePMP for advertising its
identity, capabilities, and neighbors on the Ethernet/wired interface.

Disabled: ePMP does not receive or transmit LLDP packets from/to its
neighbors.

Enabled: ePMP can receive LLDP packets from its neighbors and send LLDP
packets to its neighbors, depending on the LLDP Mode configuration below.

LLDP Mode Receive and Transmit: ePMP sends and receives LLDP packets to/from its
neighbors on the Ethernet/LAN interface.

Receive Only: ePMP receives LLDP packets from its neighbors on the
Ethernet/LAN interface and discovers them.

PPPoE Intermediate When enabled, during the PPPoE Discovery phase the AP inserts access loop
Agent identification into the PPPoE PADR packets. This mechanism helps the service
provider to distinguish between end hosts connected via Ethernet as an access
device (typically, home routers situated below an ePMP subscriber device).

PAGE 4-54
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

On the AP, PPPoE Intermediate Agent enables subscriber line identification by

tagging Ethernet frames of corresponding users with Vendor-Specific PPPoE
Tags “Circuit ID” (defining AP name, frame, slot, port, and VLAN ID
information) and “Remote ID” (defining user phone number).

Broadcast / Multicast Traffic Shaping (Subscriber Module Mode) (Bridge Mode)

Broadcast Packet Enabled: This allows the user to set the Broadcast Packet Rate below.
Limit Configure this parameter to limit the number of broadcast packets that will be
allowed on the ingress of the radio’s Ethernet port. Set the packets per second
(Subscriber Module
value to limit the impact of events such as broadcast storms.
Mode)
Disabled: There is no limit on the amount of broadcast traffic that will be
(Bridge Mode)
allowed into the ingress of the radio’s Ethernet port.

Broadcast Packet Set the packets per second value to limit the amount of broadcast traffic that
Rate will be allowed on the ingress on the radio’s Ethernet port. The packets per
second limit can be set individually on each ePMP radio. The range is 100 to
(Subscriber Module
16000 packets per second. The default is 1000.
Mode)

(Bridge Mode)

Reliable Multicast Enabled: This feature allows ePMP to support IGMP capable devices. Once a
multicast group is identified, the AP allows multicast traffic to be sent only to
the SMs within the multicast group. The SMs support up to 5 unique multicast
groups. Also, when this option is enabled, the multicast traffic is sent to the
SMs using the current Downlink MCS rate.

Disabled: ePMP will still support IGMP capable devices but the multicast traffic
will be sent using MCS 1 on the downlink to all SMs, regardless of the multicast
group.

Multicast Group Limit Configure the maximum number of simultaneous multicast groups that the SM
will allow from devices below it. The default is 3.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

(Bridge Mode)

Multicast VLAN Enabled: A VLAN tag will be added to all untagged multicast traffic entering
the SM’s LAN port before sending it to the AP and remove tags in the opposite
(Subscriber Module
direction from traffic (tagged with Multicast VLAN ID) entering on the SM’s
Mode)
WAN port before sending to the SM’s LAN port.
(Bridge Mode)
Disabled: When disabled, no changes are made to untagged multicast traffic
passing through the SM.

Multicast VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include this VLAN tag to all untagged multicast
traffic entering on the SM’s LAN port before sending it to the AP and remove
(Subscriber Module
tags in the opposite direction from multicast traffic (tagged with Multicast
Mode)
VLAN ID) entering on the SM’s WAN port before sending to the SM’s LAN port.
(Bridge Mode)

PAGE 4-55
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Multicast VLAN ePMP radios can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities described
Priority in the IEEE 802.1p specification. Multicast VLAN Priority represents the VLAN
Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization field to
(Subscriber Module
give precedence to the device's multicast data.
Mode)
This parameter only takes effect if the Multicast VLAN parameter is enabled.
(Bridge Mode)
Configure this parameter to set the value of the Priority code point field in the
802.1q tag for traffic on the Multicast VLAN originating from the SM. The
default value is 0.

De-Militarized Zone (Subscriber Module NAT Mode)

DMZ Disabled: Packets arriving on the wireless interface destined for the Ethernet
side of the network are dropped if a session does not exist between the
(Subscriber Module
Source IP (Wireless) and Destination IP (Ethernet). By default, NAT requires
NAT Mode)
the sessions to be initiated from the Ethernet side before a packet is accepted
from the Wireless to the Wired side.

Enabled: Any packets with an unknown destination port (not associated with
an existing session or not defined in the port forwarding rules) are
automatically sent to the device configured with DMZ IP Address.

IP Address Configure the IP address of an SM-connected device that is allowed to provide

network services to the wide-area network.
(Subscriber Module
NAT Mode)

Allow ICMP to DMZ Enabled: ICMP packets are forwarded to the DMZ IP

(Subscriber Module Disabled: SM answers ICMP requests, and SM Wireless IP Address becomes
NAT Mode) reachable by ping when DMZ enabled

The Security page is used to configure system security features including authentication and
Layer2/Layer3 Firewall rules.

If a device firewall rule is added with Action set to Deny and Interface set to LAN or
WAN and no other rule attribute is configured, the device will drop all Ethernet or
wireless traffic, respectively. Ensure that all firewall rules are specific to the type of
traffic which must be denied and that no rules exist in the devices with the only Action
set to Deny and Interface set to LAN or WAN. To regain access to the device, perform
a factory default.

PAGE 4-56
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 44 Configuration > Security page (Access Point Mode)

Figure 45 Configuration > Security page (Subscriber Module Mode)

PAGE 4-57
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Table 4-8 Configuration > Security page attributes

Attribute Description

Security Options

Wireless Security For Access Point mode devices, select the security mode enforced upon
network entry.
(Access Point Mode)
For Subscriber Module mode devices, select the security mode utilized upon
network entry attempts.

Open: All Subscriber Module devices requesting network entry are allowed
registration.

WPA2: The WPA2 mechanism provides AES radio link encryption and
Subscriber Module network entry authentication. When enabled, the
Subscriber Module must register using the Authentication Pre-shared Key
configured on the Access Point and Subscriber Module.

RADIUS: Enables Subscriber Module authentication via a pre-configured

Radius server.

WPA2

WPA2 Pre-shared Key Configure this key on the Access Point, then configure the Subscriber Module
with this key to complete the authentication configuration. This key must be
between 8 to 128 symbols.

RADIUS (Access Point Mode)

Servers For more Radio servers, click Add. Up to 3 Radius servers can be configured
on the device with the following attributes:
(Access Point Mode)
IP Address: IP Address of the Radius server on the network.

Port: The Radius server port. The default is 1812.

Secret: Secret key that is used to communicate with the Radius server.

Server Retries The number of times the radio will retry authentication with the configured
Radius server before it fails authentication of the SM.
(Access Point Mode)

Server Timeout Timeout between each retry with the configured Radius server before it fails
authentication of the SM.
(Access Point Mode)

GUI User This applies to both the AP and its registered SMs.
Authentication
Device Local Only: The device’s GUI authentication is local to the device using
(Access Point Mode) one of the accounts configured under Configuration->System->Account
Management.

Remote RADIUS Server Only: The device’s GUI authentication is performed

using a RADIUS server.

PAGE 4-58
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Remote RADIUS Server and Fallback to Local: The device’s GUI

authentication is performed using a RADIUS server. Upon failure of
authentication through a RADIUS server, the authentication falls back to one
of the local accounts configured under Configuration->System->Account
Management.

EAP-TTLS Username Configure the EAP-TTLS Username to match the credentials on the RADIUS
server being used for the network.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

Use Ethernet MAC The device MAC Address can be used as the EAP-TTLS Username in either “:”
Address at EAP-TTLS or “-“ delimited format.
Username

(Subscriber Module
Mode)

EAP-TTLS Password Configure the EAP-TTLS Password to match the credentials on the RADIUS
server being used for the network.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

Authentication Configure this Identity string to match the credentials on the RADIUS server
Identity String being used for the network. The default value for this parameter is
anonymous.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

Authentication Configure this Identity string to match the credentials on the RADIUS server
Identity Realm being used for the network. The default value for this parameter is
cambiumnetworks.com.
(Subscriber Module
Mode)

Default Root Default EAP-TTLS root certificate that must match the certificate on the
Certificate RADIUS server.

(Subscriber Module
Mode)

Canopy Root PMP 450 default EAP-TTLS root certificate to match the certificate on the
Certificate RADIUS server used with current PMP 450 installations.

(Subscriber Module
Mode)

User Provisioned Root Import a user certificate if a certificate different from the default certificates is
Cert 1 needed.

(Subscriber Module
Mode)

User Provisioned Root Import a second user certificate if a certificate different from the default or 1st
Cert 2 user provisioned certificate is needed.

PAGE 4-59
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

(Subscriber Module
Mode)

Firewalls

Layer 2 Firewall Enabled: Modifications to the Layer 2 Firewall Table are allowed and rules are
enforced.

Disabled: Modifications to the Layer 2 Firewall Table are not allowed and
rules are not enforced.

Layer 2 Firewall Rules The Layer 2 firewall table may be used to configure rules matching layer 2
(MAC layer) traffic which results in forwarding or dropping the traffic over the
radio link or Ethernet interface.

Layer 3 Firewall Disabled: Modifications to the Layer 3 Firewall Table are not allowed and
rules are not enforced.

Enabled: Modifications to the Layer 3 Firewall Table are allowed and rules are
enforced.

Layer 3 Firewall Rules The Layer 3 firewall table may be used to configure rules matching layer 3 (IP
layer) traffic which results in forwarding or dropping the traffic over the radio
link or Ethernet interface.

Wireless MAC Address Filtering (Access Point Mode)

Wireless MAC Filter Disabled: SMs with any MAC Address are allowed to register to the AP.

(Access Point Mode) Enabled: SMs with specific MAC addresses can be allowed (Permit) or denied
(Prevent) registration with the AP as configured under the MAC Filter List.

Wireless MAC Filter Prevent: All MAC Addresses configured under the MAC Filter List are denied
Policy registration to the AP.

(Access Point Mode) Permit: Only the MAC Addresses configured under the MAC Filter List are
allowed to register to the AP.

Wireless MAC Filter Configure the SM’s MAC addresses that will be permitted or prevented from
List registering to the AP.

(Access Point Mode)

MAC Address MAC Address of the SM

(Access Point Mode)

Description Friendly description to identify the SM

(Access Point Mode)

Use the Monitor menu to access device and network statistics and status information. This section is
used to analyze and troubleshoot network performance and operation.

PAGE 4-60
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 46 Monitor > Performance page

PAGE 4-61
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Table 4-9 Monitor > Performance page attributes

Attribute Description

Reset Statistics

Time Since Last

Time since the stats were last reset.
Reset

Ethernet Statistics – Transmitted

Total Traffic The total amount of traffic in Kbits transferred from the device Ethernet interface.

Total Packets The total number of packets transferred from the device Ethernet interface.

Packet Errors The total number of packets transmitted out of the device Ethernet interface with
errors due to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size.

Packet Drops The total number of packets dropped before sending out from the device’s
Ethernet interface due to Ethernet setup or filtering issues.

Broadcast Packets The total number of broadcast packets sent via the device Ethernet interface.

Multicast Packets The total number of multicast packets sent via the device Ethernet interface.

Ethernet Statistics – Received

Total Traffic The total amount of traffic in Kbits received by the device Ethernet interface.

Total Packets The total number of packets received by the device Ethernet interface.

Packet Errors The total number of packets received by the device Ethernet interface with errors
due to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size.

Packet Drops The total number of packets dropped before sending out from the device’s
wireless interface due to Ethernet setup or filtering issues.

Broadcast Packets The total number of broadcast packets received via the device Ethernet interface.

Multicast Packets The total number of multicast packets received via the device Ethernet interface.

SFP Statistics – Transmitted

Total Traffic The total amount of traffic in Kbits transferred from the device SFP interface.

Total Packets The total number of packets transferred from the device SFP interface.

Packet Errors The total number of packets transmitted out of the device SFP interface with
errors due to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size.

Packet Drops The total number of packets dropped before sending out from the device’s SFP
interface due to setup or filtering issues.

Broadcast Packets The total number of broadcast packets sent via the device SFP interface.

Multicast Packets The total number of multicast packets sent via the device SFP interface.

SFP Statistics - Received

Total Traffic The total amount of traffic in Kbits received by the device SFP interface.

PAGE 4-62
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Total Packets The total number of packets received by the device SFP interface.

Packet Errors The total number of packets received by the device SFP interface with errors due
to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size.

Packet Drops The total number of packets dropped before sending out of the device wireless
interface due to SFP setup or filtering issues.

Broadcast Packets The total number of broadcast packets received via the device SFP interface.

Multicast Packets The total number of multicast packets received via the device SFP interface.

Wireless Statistics – Downlink

Total Traffic The total amount of traffic transmitted out of the device wireless interface in
Kbits.

Total Packets The total number of packets transmitted out of the device wireless interface.

Error Drop The total number of packets dropped after transmitting out of the device Wireless
Packets interface due to RF errors (No acknowledgment and other RF related packet
error).

Capacity Drop The total number of packets dropped after transmitting out of the device wireless
Packets (Access interface due to capacity issues (data buffer/queue overflow or other
Point Mode) performance or internal packet errors).

Retransmission The total number of packets re-transmitted after transmitting out of the device's
Packets (Access wireless interface due to the packets not being received by the receiving device.
Point Mode)

Multicast / The total amount of multicast and broadcast traffic transmitted out of the device
Broadcast Traffic wireless interface in Kbits.

Broadcast Packets The total number of broadcast packets transmitted out of the device wireless
interface.

Multicast Packets The total number of multicast packets transmitted out of the device wireless
interface.

Wireless Statistics – Uplink

Total Traffic The total amount of traffic received via the device wireless interface in Kbits.

Total Packets The total number of packets received via the device wireless interface.

Error Drop The total number of packets dropped before sending out of the device Ethernet
Packets interface due to RF errors (packet integrity error and other RF-related packet
error).

Capacity Drop The total number of packets dropped after transmitting out of the device wireless
Packets interface due to capacity issues (data buffer/queue overflow or other
(Subscriber performance or internal packet errors).
Module Mode)

PAGE 4-63
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Multicast / The total amount of multicast and broadcast traffic received on the device
Broadcast Traffic wireless interface in Kbits.

Broadcast Packets The total number of broadcast packets received on the device wireless interface.

Multicast Packets The total number of multicast packets received on the device wireless interface.

Link Quality Defines the Packet Error Rate (PER) in the uplink direction by percentage. A
(Uplink) background color corresponds to a percentage range.

(Subscriber Blue is between 80 and 100%.

Module Mode)
Green is between 50 and 80%.

Yellow is between 30 and 50%.

Red is between 0 and 30%.

Link Capacity Defines the capacity of the uplink as defined by MCS. DS MCS 9 provides the
(Uplink) greatest capacity. SS MCS 1 provides the least. The capacity of the link is defined
as the percentage throughput of the actual link as compared to a link that was
(Subscriber
always running at DS MCS 9. A background color corresponds to a percentage
Module Mode)
range.

Blue is between 80 and 100%.

Green is between 50 and 80%.

Yellow is between 30 and 50%.

Red is between 0 and 30%.

System Statistics

Session Drops Indicates the total number of Subscriber Module sessions dropped on the Access
Point.

Link Drop Counter Indicates the total number of times the wireless link was lost.

Total Device Indicates the total number of times the device has been rebooted since the
Reboots statistics were last reset from the GUI, CLI, or SNMP.

Soft Device Indicates the number of times the device has been rebooted by the user
Reboots through GUI, CLI, or SNMP since the statistics were last reset from the GUI, CLI,
or SNMP.

Hard Device Indicates the number of times the device has been rebooted via power feeding
Reboots and due to power outage since the statistics were last reset from the GUI, CLI,
or SNMP.

Network Entry The total number of Network Entry Attempts by Subscriber Module devices.
Attempts (Access
Point Mode)

PAGE 4-64
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Successful The total number of successful network entry attempts.

Network Entries
(Access Point
Mode)

Network Entry The total number of failed Network Entry Attempts by Subscriber Module devices.
Authentication
Failures (Access
Point Mode)

Radar (DFS)
Detections

Subscriber Module Statistics (Access Point Mode)

MAC Address MAC Address of the Subscriber Module connected to the Access Point.

Total Uplink The total amount of traffic received via the Access Point wireless interface from
(Kbits) the Subscriber Module in Kbits.

Total Uplink The total number of packets received via the Access Point wireless interface from
Packets this Subscriber Module.

Uplink Packet The total number of packets dropped before sending out of the Access Point
Drops Ethernet interface due to RF errors (packet integrity error and other RF-related
packet error) from the Subscriber Module.

Total Downlink The total amount of traffic transmitted out of the Access Point wireless interface
(Kbits) in Kbits.

Total Downlink The total number of packets transmitted out of the Access Point wireless
Packets interface.

Downlink Packet The total number of packets dropped after transmitting out of the Access Point
Drops wireless interface due to RF errors (No acknowledgment and other RF-related
packet errors).

Downlink Capacity The total number of packets dropped after transmitting out of the Access Point
Packet Drops Wireless interface due to capacity issues (data buffer/queue overflow or other
performance or internal packet errors).

Downlink The total number of packets re-transmitted after transmitting out of the Access
Retransmitted Point Wireless interface due to the packets not being received by the Subscriber
Packets Module.

Downlink Power The transmit power of the Access Point for the downlink packets to the Subscriber
(dBm) Module.

Downlink Packets Per MCS

MCS 1 – MCS 9 The number of packets (and percentage of total packets) transmitted out of the
device wireless interface for every modulation mode used by the device
DS / SS
transmitter, based on radio conditions.

PAGE 4-65
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

DS represents dual-stream transmissions and SS represents single-stream

transmissions.

Uplink Packets Per MCS

MCS 1 – MCS 9 The number of packets (and percentage of total packets) received on the device
wireless interface for every modulation mode, based on radio conditions.
DS / SS
DS represents dual-stream transmissions and SS represents single-stream
transmissions.

Downlink Frame Time

Total Frame Time

Used
Percentage of frame time used in the uplink.
(Access Point
Mode)

Figure 47 Monitor > System page

Table 4-10 Monitor > System page attributes

Attribute Description

Hardware Version Board hardware version information.

Serial Number
Serial Number information.
(MSN)

Firmware Version U-Boot version information.

PAGE 4-66
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Software Version The currently operating version of software on the device.

Software Version
The currently operating version of software on the device.
(Active Bank)

Software Version The backup software version on the device is used upon failure of the active bank.
(Inactive Bank) Two software upgrades in sequence will update both the Active Software Bank
Version and the Inactive Software Bank Version.

Device-Agent The operating version of the device agent, which is used for communication with
Version cnMaestro.

NTP Status Indicates whether time and date have been obtained from the NTP server.

Date and Time Current date and time, subject to time zone offset introduced by the configuration
of the device Time Zone parameter. Until a valid NTP server is configured, this
field will display the time configured from the factory.

System Uptime The total system uptime since the last device reset.

Wireless MAC The hardware address of the device's wireless interface.

Address

Ethernet MAC The hardware address of the device LAN (Ethernet) interface.
Address

SFP Port MAC The hardware address of the device SFP interface.
Address

Sync Source The status of the configured GPS synchronization source.

Status

Read-Only Users Displays the number of active Read-Only users logged into the radio.

Read-Write Users Displays the number of active Read-Write users logged into the radio.

GUI User The method by which users are authenticated when logging into the device
Authentication management interface.

Factory Reset Via Enabled: When Enabled under Tools > Backup/Restore > Reset Via Power
Power Sequence Sequence, it is possible to reset the radio’s configuration to factory defaults using
the power cycle sequence explained under Resetting ePMP to factory defaults by
power cycling on page 5-9.

Disabled: When Disabled, it is not possible to factory default the radio’s

configuration using the power cycle sequence.

cnMaestro The current management status of the device for the Cambium Cloud Server.
Connection Status When Enabled under Configuration->System, the device will be managed by the
Cambium Remote Management System, which allows all Cambium devices to be
managed from the Cambium Cloud Server.

cnMaestro The ID that the device is currently using to be managed by the Cambium Cloud
Account ID Server.

PAGE 4-67
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 48 Monitor > Wireless page (Access Point Mode)

Figure 49 Monitor > Wireless page (Subscriber Module Mode)

Table 4-11 Monitor > Wireless page attributes

Attribute Description

Registered Access
Point SSID
SSID of the Access Point to which the Subscriber Module is registered.
(Subscriber
Module Mode only

PAGE 4-68
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Wireless Status Up: The device's wireless interface is functioning and sending beacons.
(Access Point
Down: The device's wireless interface has encountered an error disallowing full
Mode)
operation. Reset the device to reinitiate the wireless interface.

Wireless Status Up: The device wireless interface is functioning and the device has completed
(Subscriber network entry.
Module Mode)
Down: The device's wireless interface has encountered an error disallowing full
operation. Evaluate radio and security configuration on the Access Point and
Subscriber Module device to determine the network entry failure.

Registered Access
Point MAC
Address Wireless MAC address of the Access Point to which the Subscriber Module is
registered.
(Subscriber
Module Mode)

Range
The calculated distance from the Access Point, determined by radio signal
(Subscriber propagation delay.
Module Mode)

Operating
The current frequency at which the device is operating.
Frequency

Operating Channel
The current channel size at which the device is transmitting and receiving.
Bandwidth

DFS Status N/A: DFS operation is not required for the region configured in parameter Country
Code.

Channel Availability Check: Before transmitting, the device must check the
configured Frequency Carrier for radar pulses for 60 seconds). If no radar pulses
are detected, the device transitions to state In-Service Monitoring.

In-Service Monitoring: Radio is transmitting and receiving normally while

monitoring for radar pulses that require a channel move.

Radar Signal Detected: The receiver has detected a valid radar pulse and is
carrying out detect-and-avoid mechanisms (moving to an alternate channel).

In-Service Monitoring at Alternative Channel: The radio has detected a radar pulse
and has moved the operation to a frequency configured in DFS Alternative
Frequency Carrier 1 or DFS Alternative Frequency Carrier 2.

System Not In Service due to DFS: The radio has detected a radar pulse and has
failed channel availability checks on all alternative frequencies. The non-
occupancy time for the radio frequencies in which radar was detected is 30
minutes.

Downlink SNR The Signal-to-Noise Ratio of the signal being received from the Access Point.

PAGE 4-69
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

(Subscriber
Module Mode)

Transmitter Power The current power level at which the device is transmitting.

Uplink MCS

(Subscriber Specifies the current MCS utilized for uplink transmission.

Module Mode)

Registered
Subscriber
Modules The count of registered Subscriber Modules.
(Access Point
Mode)

Ethernet Status The speed and duplex at which the configured LAN port is operating.

Country Defines the country code being used by the device. The country code of the
Subscriber Module follows the country code of the associated Access Point unless
it is an FCC SKU in which case the country code is the United States or Canada.
Country code defines the regulatory rules in use for the device.

Registered
Subscriber Use the Registered Subscriber Modules table to monitor the registered Subscriber
Modules Module device, their key RF status, and statistics information. The Subscriber
management interface may also be accessed by clicking the hyperlinks in the IPv4
(Access Point
/ IPv6 Addresses and Device Name columns.
Mode)
Click the Deregister button to disassociate the Subscriber Module device from the
Access Point.

MAC Address

(Access Point The MAC address of the Subscriber Module wireless interface.
Mode)

IPv4 / IPv6
Addresses
The IP address of the Subscriber Module wireless interface.
(Access Point
Mode)

Device Name
(Access Point The configured device name of the Subscriber Module wireless interface.
Mode)

SM Distance
Indicates the calculated distance of the Subscriber Module from the Access Point.
(miles)

Session Time The time duration for which the Subscriber Module has been registered and in
(hh:mm:ss) session with the Access Point.

PAGE 4-70
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

(Access Point
Mode)

RSSI (dBm) Indicates the estimated RSSI of the AP at the SM (first value) and the RSSI of the
Downlink / Uplink SM measured at the AP (second value).

SNR (dB) Indicates the estimated SNR of the AP at the SM (first value) and the SRN of the
Downlink / Uplink SM measured at the AP (second value).

MCS Downlink /
Uplink Current MCS at which the downlink (first value) and uplink (second value) are
(Access Point operating.
Mode)

Downlink Quality
The downlink quality is based on the current MCS and PER (Packet Error Rate) for
(Access Point this SM.
Mode)

Downlink Capacity The downlink capacity is based on the current DL MCS for the highest supported
(Access Point MCS (MCS15). The downlink capacity is based on the current DL MCS for the
Mode) highest supported MCS (MCS15).

MU-MIMO Gain Indicates if MU-MIMO is supported by the subscriber and the MU-MIMO gain
achieved by MU-MIMO capable subscribers.

Model Name Model of Subscriber Module

Add As Preferred
Click the Add button to add the Access Point to the Preferred Access Points
(Subscriber
List under Configuration > Radio.
Module Mode)

SSID

(Subscriber The SSID of the visible Access Point.

Module Mode)

MAC Address

(Subscriber The MAC address of the visible Access Point.

Module Mode)

Frequency Carrier
(MHz)
The current operating frequency of the visible Access Point.
(Subscriber
Module Mode)

Channel
Bandwidth (MHz)
The current operating channel bandwidth of the visible Access Point.
(Subscriber
Module Mode)

PAGE 4-71
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

RSSI (dBm)

(Subscriber The current measured Received Signal Strength Indicator at the Access Point.
Module Mode)

SNR (dB)
The current measured Signal-to-Noise Ratio of the Subscriber Module to Access
(Subscriber Point link.
Module Mode)

Registration State The indication of the result of the Subscriber Module device network entry
attempt:
(Subscriber
Module Mode) Successful: Subscriber Module registration is successful

Failed: Out of Range: The Subscriber Module is out of the Access Point’s
configured maximum range (Max Range parameter)

Failed: Capacity limit reached at Access Point: The Access Point is no longer
allowing Subscriber Module network entry due to capacity reached

Failed: No Allocation on Access Point: The Subscriber Module to Access Point

handshaking failed due to a misconfigured pre-shared key between the Subscriber
Module and Access Point

Failed: SW Version Incompatibility: The version of software resident on the

Access Point is older than the software version on the Subscriber Module

Failed: PTP Mode: ACL Policy: The Access Point is configured with PTP Access
set to MAC Limited and the Subscriber Module’s MAC address is not configured in
the Access Point’s PTP MAC Address field

Failed: Other: The Access Point does not have the required available memory to
allow network entry

Session Time
(hh:mm:ss) This timer indicates the time elapsed since the Subscriber Module registered to
(Subscriber the Access Point.
Module Mode)

Wireless Security
This field indicates the security state of the Access Point to Subscriber Module
(Subscriber link.
Module Mode)

Meets Reg Criteria Yes: The scanned Access Point meets the Network Entry criteria defined by the
internal Network Algorithm.
(Subscriber
Module Mode) No: The scanned Access Point does not meet the Network Entry criteria defined
by the internal Network Algorithm.

PAGE 4-72
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Use the Throughput Chart page to reference a line chart visual representation of system throughput
over time. The blue line indicates downlink throughput and the orange line indicates uplink throughput.
The X-axis may be configured to display data over seconds, minutes, or hours, and the Y-axis is adjusted
automatically based on average throughput. Hover over data points to display details.

Figure 50 Monitor > Throughput Chart page

Table 4-12 Monitor > Throughput Chart page attributes

Attribute Description

Throughput
Measurement Adjust the X-axis to display throughput intervals in seconds, minutes, or hours
Period

Use the GPS Status page to reference key information about the device's GPS readings, tracked
satellites, and firmware version.

PAGE 4-73
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 51 Monitor > GPS page attributes (Access Point mode)

Table 4-13 Monitor > GPS page attributes (Access Point Mode)

Attribute Description

On-board GPS On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the
Latitude Device Latitude information from the on-board GPS chip.

(Access Point
Mode)

On-board GPS On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the
Longitude Device Longitude information from the on-board GPS chip.

(Access Point
Mode)

On-board GPS On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the
Height Device height above sea level from the onboard GPS chip.

(Access Point
Mode)

GPS Time On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the
(Greenwich Mean time from the onboard GPS chip.
Time)

(Access Point
Mode)

GPS Firmware On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field indicates the current firmware
version version of the onboard GPS chip.

(Access Point
Mode)

Satellites Tracked On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field indicates the number of satellites
currently tracked by the onboard GPS chip.

PAGE 4-74
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

(Access Point
Mode)

Satellites Visible On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field indicates the number of satellites
visible to the onboard GPS chip.
(Access Point
Mode)

Satellites The Satellites table provides information about each satellite that is visible or
tracked along with the Satellite ID and Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) of the satellite.
(Access Point
Mode)

ID Represents the Satellite ID.

(Access Point
Mode)

Signal-to-Noise This is an expression of the carrier signal quality concerning signal noise.
Ratio

(Access Point
Mode)

Status Status of each Satellite available.

(Access Point
Mode)

Use the Network Status page to reference key information about the device network status.

PAGE 4-75
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 52 Monitor > Network page

Table 4-14 Monitor > Network page attributes

Attribute Description

Ethernet Interface

IP Assignment Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields IP

Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS
Server.

DHCP: Device management IP addressing (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,

and DNS Server) is assigned via a network DHCP server, and parameters IP
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Preferred DNS Server, and Alternate DNS
Server are not configurable.

IP Address Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet
protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network.

PAGE 4-76
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

If IP Address Assignment is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP

address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to fallback IP
192.168.0.1 (Access Point) or 192.168.0.2 (Subscriber Module).

Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if Device IP
Address (LAN) is configured to 192.168.2.1 and IP Subnet Mask (LAN) is
configured to 255.255.255.0, the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X.

Default Gateway Configure the IP address of the device on the current network that acts as a
gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other
networks.

MTU Size The currently configured Maximum Transmission Unit for the device Ethernet
(LAN) interface. Larger MTU configurations can enable the network to operate
with greater efficiency, but in the case of retransmissions due to packet errors,
efficiency is reduced since large packets must be resent in the event of an error.

Main PSU Port The speed and duplex at which the configured LAN port is operating.

Port Speed The speed at which the configured LAN port is operating.

Port Duplex Mode The duplex at which the configured LAN port is operating.

Network Status

DNS Server IP The configured IP address(es) of the network DNS servers.

DHCP Option 82 Status of DHCP Option 82 operation in the network.

NTP Status Represents the status of NTP retrieval in the network.

ARP Table

MAC Address MAC Address of the devices on the bridge.

IP Address IP Address of the devices on the bridge.

Interface The interface on which the ePMP identified the devices on.

Bridge Table

MAC Address The hardware address of the ePMP device.

Port The port to which the device is connected.

Subscriber Module
MAC Address for the connected Subscriber Module device.
MAC

Aging Timer (secs) Time set for the MAC addresses in the Bridge table before renewal.

PAGE 4-77
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Use the System Log page to view the device system log and to download the log file to the accessing
PC/device.

Figure 53 Monitor > System Log page

Table 4-15 Monitor > System Log page attributes

Attribute Description

Syslog Display Enabled: The system log file is displayed on the management GUI.

Disabled: The system log file is hidden on the management GUI.

Download Use this button to download the full system log file to a connected PC or device.

The Tools menu provides several options for upgrading device software, configuration backup/restore,
managing licenses, analyzing RF spectrum, testing the wireless link, testing network connectivity, and
analyzing interferers.

Use the Software Upgrade page to update the device radio software to take advantage of new software
features and improvements.

Read the Release Notes associated with each software release for special notices,
feature updates, resolved software issues, and known software issues.

The Release Notes may be accessed at the Cambium Support Center.

PAGE 4-78
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 54 Tools > Software Upgrade page

Table 4-16 Tools > Software Upgrade page attributes

Attribute Description

Main Software

Hardware Version Defines the board type and frequency band of operation.

Software Version Defines the current operating software version.

Software Version ePMP devices two banks of flash memory which each contain a version of the
(Active Bank) software. The version of the software last upgraded onto the Flash memory is
made the Active Bank. This software will be used by the device when rebooted.

Software Version The version of the software that was the Active Bank is made the Inactive Bank
(Inactive Bank) when another version of the software is upgraded onto the Flash memory. The
Inactive Bank of the software will be used by the device in case the Active Bank
cannot be used due to a failure condition.

Firmware Version The current U-boot version.

Upgrade Options URL: A web server may be used to retrieve software upgrade packages
(downloaded to the device via the webserver). For example, if a web server is
running at IP address 192.168.2.1 and the software upgrade packages are located in
the home directory, an operator may select an option From URL and configure the
Software Upgrade Source field to
http://192.168.2.1/<software_upgrade_package>.

Local File: Click Browse to select the local file containing the software upgrade
package.

Select File Click Browse to select a local file (located on the device accessing the web
management interface) for upgrading the device software.

PAGE 4-79
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Upgrade Click the Upgrade button to begin the software upgrade process.

Please ensure that power to the device is not interrupted during a software
upgrade. Power interruption may cause flash corruption and render the device
inoperable.

GPS Firmware

Firmware Version The current firmware of the on-board GPS chip.

Upgrade Options URL: A web server may be used to retrieve GPS firmware upgrade packages
(downloaded to the device via the webserver). For example, if a web server is
running at IP address 192.168.2.1 and the firmware upgrade packages are located in
the home directory, an operator may select an option From URL and configure the
GPS Firmware Upgrade Source field to
http://192.168.2.1/<firmware_upgrade_package>.

Local File: Click Browse to select the local file containing the GPS firmware
upgrade package.

Select File Click Browse to select a local file (located on the device accessing the web
management interface) for upgrading the on-board GPS chip firmware.

Use the Backup/Restore page to update the device radio software to take advantage of new software
features and improvements.

Figure 55 Tools > Backup/Restore page

PAGE 4-80
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Table 4-17 Tools > Backup/Restore page attributes

Attribute Description

Backup Configuration

Configuration File Text (Editable): Choosing this option will download the configuration file in the
Format .json format and can be viewed and/or edited using a standard text editor.

Binary (Secured): Choosing this option will download the configuration file in the
.bin format, and cannot be viewed and/or edited using an editor. Use this format
for a secure backup.

Restore Configuration

Select File Click Browse to select a local file (located on the device accessing the web
management interface) for restoring the device configuration.

Skip unsupported In the case of configuration incompatibility, the unsupported configuration

configuration elements can be ignored and skipped.
elements

Factory Default Configuration

Reset Via Power Enabled: When Enabled, it is possible to reset the radio’s configuration to factory
Sequence defaults using the power cycle sequence explained under Resetting ePMP to
factory defaults by power cycling on page 5-9.

Disabled: When Disabled, it is not possible to factory default the radio’s

configuration using the power cycle sequence.

Retain Passwords When set to Enabled, then after a factory default of the radio for any reason, the
passwords used for GUI and CLI access will not be defaulted and will remain
unchanged. The default value of this field is Disabled.

If the passwords cannot be retrieved after the factory default, access to the radio
will be lost/unrecoverable. This feature prevents unauthorized users from gaining
access to the radio for any reason, including theft.

Keep Passwords When the Keep Passwords checkbox is selected, the passwords used for GUI and
CLI access will not be defaulted and will remain unchanged. This is a one-time
option, and it does not apply to factory default procedures completed by power
cycling (Reset Via Power Sequence).

Reset to Factory Use this button to reset the device to its factory default configuration.
Defaults
A reset to factory default configuration resets all device parameters. With the
Subscriber Module device in the default configuration, it may not be able to
register to an Access Point device configured for your network.

Backup Technical Support File

Download The Backup Technical Support File is a compressed archive of the applicable
statistics and configuration parameters used by Cambium Support for
troubleshooting. This file is downloaded from the ePMP device to the accessing
device.

PAGE 4-81
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

The AP’s License Management page is used to:

• Install licensing for ePMP Elevate subscriber access allotments

• Convert the AP from Lite (10 subscribers) to Full (120 subscribers)

• Configure the Country Code ETSI-locked devices

There are two types of ePMP Elevate license management mechanisms available on the ePMP device –
Flexible and Fixed, described below:

Figure 56 AP ePMP Elevate license management options

Elevate Flexible Licensing is available only for ePMP AP devices with GPS sync.

Country Code configuration for ETSI locked device and Full Capacity Keys for AP Lite devices are
available only via Fixed License Management. Elevate is available via Fixed or Flexible License
Management.

To use flexible licensing, the AP must have DNS server access to be able to resolve
URLs (and communicate with the license server). Also, the AP must have a valid,
accurate time server (NTP) connection.

PAGE 4-82
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 57 Tools > License Management page

Table 4-18 Tools > License Management attributes

Attribute Description

Flexible License Management

License Server Disabled: No communication with the License Server is established

Agent
Enabled: Enables License Server functionality to obtain the number of allowed
ePMP Elevate SMs to be connected to the AP

Cloud Licensing ID This field represents a Cambium Networks customer identification used for AP
identification on the License Server. This identifier is generated upon License
Entitlement activation at the Cambium Networks web-based Support Center.

Connection Status The Connection Status displays the License Server process state when the License
Server Agent is Enabled. This status may also be referenced on the device Home
page.

Enable Proxy Disabled: The AP must have a valid internet connection to reach the license
server

Enabled: A proxy server is specific for the license server access from a private
network

Proxy Server IP Specify the IP address of the proxy server used for internet access from a private
Address network

Proxy Server Port Specify the port used on the proxy server for internet access from a private
network

Refresh Requests The number of failed refresh (polling) requests to the License Server. The ePMP
Failed Elevate Subscriber Module Limit resets to 1 after the 3rd failed refresh request.

PAGE 4-83
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

Update Requests The number of failed updates (licensing information transfer) requests to the
Failed License Server. The ePMP Elevate Subscriber Module Limit resets to 1 after the 5th
failed updated request.

NTP Status Represents whether or not the current time and date have been retrieved from the
configured NTP server

ePMP Elevate The number of ePMP Elevate devices allowed to register to the AP
Subscriber Module
Limit

Flexible License Management

Local License Key The "License Key" is obtained from support.cambiumnetworks.com and must be
entered into this field to enable additional functionality (registration capacity,
ePMP Elevate support) of the ePMP device.

Version Specifies the licensing version scheme for the License Key

MAC address The MAC Address is extracted from the License Key and must match the MAC
Address of this device for the licenses to be enacted.

Country Code A two-character value representing the licensed country

Subscriber Module ePMP Lite / Force 110 devices are limited to 10 SMs in AP TDD mode. SM Limit will
Limit display Unlocked if a license is present which allows no limit of SMs to register to
the device in AP TDD mode.

Signature A valid License Key must have a valid signature included. The status is displayed
after a License Key is entered and saved. Licenses can only be used if the
signature is valid.

The Spectrum Analyzer feature is no longer available from the web User Interface. This tool is now
available as a stand-alone application and can be downloaded from the Cambium Networks Support
site. https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp_tools_and_docs.

Use the eAlign page to aid with subscriber link alignment.

PAGE 4-84
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 58 Tools > eAlign page

A valid link to an SM is required to provide meaningful RSSI measurements.

ePMP supports Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) where the Subscriber
Module devices are instructed by the Access Point to adjust their Tx power for the
Subscriber Module device signal (UL RSSI) to arrive at the Access Point at a
predetermined RSSI level (configurable on the Access Point under
Configuration>Radio>Power Control>Subscriber Module Target Receive Level). This
feature is beneficial to keep the overall noise floor in the sector to an acceptable level.
However, the feature negates the purpose of eAlign measurements on the Access Point
device since, during the alignment, the Subscriber Module may constantly change its Tx
power. It is recommended to turn off ATPC and set the Subscriber Module Tx power to
maximum allowable power during alignment.

While aligning the link using eAlign, please follow these steps:

Procedure:

1. On the Subscriber Module, set Configuration > Radio > Power Control > Max Tx
Power to Manual.

2. Set Configuration > Radio > Power Control > Transmitter Power to 26 dBm (or
maximum value allowed by regulations).

3. Click the Save button

PAGE 4-85
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

4. Perform link alignment using eAlign.

5. Once alignment is complete, set Configuration > Radio > Power Control > Max
Tx Power back to Auto

6. Click the Save button

Use the Wireless Link Test page to conduct a simple test of wireless throughput. This allows the user to
determine the throughput that can be expected on a particular link without having to use external tools.

Figure 59 Tools > Wireless Link Test page

Table 4-19 Tools > Wireless Link Test page attributes

Attribute Description

Test Setup

Mode Single Radio: The link test is conducted between the Access Point and one
Subscriber Module

Dual SM: The link test is conducted between the Access Point and two grouped
Subscriber Modules (must be operating in MU-MIMO mode).

PAGE 4-86
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Attribute Description

SM MAC Address Choose the MAC Address of the Subscriber Module with which the wireless link
test will be conducted.

Packet Size Choose the Packet Size to use for the throughput test

Duration Choose the time duration in seconds to use for the throughput test

Downlink This field indicates the result of the throughput test on the downlink, in Mbps

Uplink This field indicates the result of the throughput test on the uplink, in Mbps

Average An auto-adjusting chart displaying the average throughput of the link

Registered This table provides information about the wireless link of each registered
Subscriber Subscriber Module.
Modules

Watchdog performs ping checks to determine the reachability of a target IP address. If the target IP
address is unreachable, a chosen action is performed.

Figure 60 Tools > Watchdog page

PAGE 4-87
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Table 4-20 Tools > Watchdog page attributes

Attribute Description

Test Setup

Watchdog Disabled: The device does not ping a specified IP address periodically for
verification of connectivity

Enabled: The device periodically pings the IP address specified. If IP connectivity

is lost, the action defined in Watchdog Action is performed.

Watchdog Action Wireless Restart: In case of lost ping connectivity to the specified IP address, the
device automatically restarts the wireless interface.

Ethernet Restart: In case of lost ping connectivity to the specified IP address, the
device automatically restarts the Ethernet interface.

Device Reboot: In case of lost ping connectivity to the specified IP address, the
device automatically reboots.

IP Address Indicates the target IP address for which the device attempts ping connectivity
diagnostics.

Watchdog Ping Indicates the interval in minutes between each ping connectivity diagnostic.
Interval

Watchdog Ping Indicates the number of ping retries executed by the device before considering
Retries the test failed (and conducting the action defined in Watchdog Action).

Use the Ping page to conduct a simple test of IP connectivity to other devices that are reachable from
the network. If no ping response is received or if “Destination Host Unreachable” is reported, the target
may be down, there may be no route back to the device, or there may be a failure in the network
hardware (i.e. DNS server failure).

PAGE 4-88
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Figure 61 Tools > Ping page

Table 4-21 Tools > Ping page attributes

Attribute Description

Ping

IP Address IPv4: The ping test is conducted via the IPv4 protocol.
Version
IPv6: The ping test is conducted via the IPv6 protocol.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the ping target.

Number of Enter the total number of ping requests to send to the target.
packets (-c)

Buffer size (-s) Enter the number of data bytes to be sent.

TTL (-t) Set the IP Time-To-Live (TTL) for multicast packets. This flag applies if the ping
target is a multicast address.

Ping results The results of the ping test are displayed in the box.

PAGE 4-89
CHAPTER 4: USING THE DEVICE MANAGEMENT USING THE MENU OPTIONS
INTERFACE

Use the Traceroute page to display the route (path) and associated diagnostics for IP connectivity
between the device and the destination specified.

Figure 62 Tools > Traceroute page

Table 4-22 Tools > Traceroute page attributes

Attribute Description

Traceroute

IP Address Enter the IP address of the target of the traceroute diagnostic.

Fragmentation (-F) ON: Allow the source and target to fragment probe packets.

OFF: Do not fragment probe packets (on the source or target).

Trace method (-l) ICMP ECHO: Use ICMP ECHO for traceroute probes.

UDP: Use UDP for traceroute probes.

Display TTL (-l) ON: Display TTL values for each hop on the route.

OFF: Suppress display of TTL values for each hop on the route.

Verbose (-v) ON: ICMP packets other than TIME_EXCEEDED and UNREACHABLE are
displayed in the output.

OFF: Suppress display of extraneous ICMP messaging.

Traceroute Results Traceroute test results are displayed in the box.

PAGE 4-90
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND USING THE MENU OPTIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING

Chapter 5: Operation and Troubleshooting

This chapter provides instructions for operators of ePMP networks. The following topics are described in
this chapter:

• General Planning for troubleshooting on page 5-2

• Upgrading device software on page 5-3
• Testing hardware on page 5-4
• Troubleshooting the radio link on page 5-7
• Resetting ePMP to factory defaults by power cycling on page 5-9

PAGE 5-1
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND GENERAL PLANNING FOR
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING

Effective troubleshooting depends in part on measures that you take before you experience trouble in
your network. Cambium recommends the following measures for each site:

Procedure:

1 Identify troubleshooting tools that are available at your site (such as a protocol analyzer).

2 Identify commands and other sources that can capture baseline data for the site. These may
include:

• Ping
• tracert or traceroute
• Throughput Test results
• Throughput data
• Configure GUI page captures
• Monitor GUI page captures
• Session logs
3 Start a log for the site, including:

• Operating procedures
• Site-specific configuration records
• Network topology
• Software releases
• Types of hardware deployed
• Site-specific troubleshooting process
• Escalation procedures
• GPS latitude/longitude of each network element

PAGE 5-2
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND UPGRADING DEVICE SOFTWARE
TROUBLESHOOTING

To take advantage of new features and software improvements for the ePMP system, monitor the
Cambium Networks PMP Software website: https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp

To upgrade the device software, follow this procedure:

Procedure:

1 Log in to the device GUI via the management IP

2 Navigate to page Tools, Software Upgrade

3 Under the Main Software section, set the Upgrade Option to URL to pull the software file from a
network software server or select Local File to upload a file from the accessing device.
If URL is selected, enter the server IP address, Server Port, and File path.

4 If Local File is selected, click Browse to launch the file selection dialogue

5 Click Upgrade

Do not power off the unit in the middle of an upgrade process.

6 Once the software upgrade is complete, click the Reset icon.

PAGE 5-3
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND TESTING HARDWARE
TROUBLESHOOTING

This section describes how to test the hardware when it fails on startup or during operation.

Before testing hardware, confirm that all outdoor cables, that is those that connect the device to
equipment inside the building, are of the supported type, as defined in Ethernet cabling on page 2-81

When the power supply is connected to the main power supply, the expected LED behavior is:

• The Power (green) LED illuminates steadily.

If the expected LED operation does not occur, or if a fault is suspected in the hardware, check the LED
states and choose the correct test procedure:

• Power LED is off on page 5-4

• Ethernet LED is off on page 5-4

Meaning: Either the power supply is not receiving power from the AC/DC outlet, or there is a wiring
fault in the unit.

Action: Remove the device cable from the PSU and observe the effect on the Power LED. If the Power
LED does not illuminate, confirm that the mains power supply is working, for example, check the plug. If
the power supply is working, report a suspected power supply fault to Cambium Networks.

Meaning: There is no Ethernet traffic between the device and the power supply.

Action: The fault may be in the LAN or device cable:

• Remove the LAN cable from the power supply, examine it, and confirm it is not faulty.
• If the PC connection is working, remove the AP/SM cable from the power supply, examine it, and
check that the wiring to pins 1,2 and 3,6 is correct and not crossed.

PAGE 5-4
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND TESTING HARDWARE
TROUBLESHOOTING

Log in to the device and click Monitor, Performance. Click Reset System Counters at the bottom of the
page and wait until LAN RX – Total Packet Counter has reached 1 million. If the counter does not
increment or increments too slowly, because for example the ePMP system is newly installed and there
is no offered Ethernet traffic, then abandon this procedure and consider using the procedure Test ping
packet loss on page 5-5.

Check the LAN RX – Error Packet Counter statistic. The test has passed if this is less than 10.

If the device is connected to a managed Ethernet switch or router, it may be possible to monitor the
error rate of Ethernet packets. Please refer to the user guide of the managed network equipment. The
test has passed if the rate of packet errors reported by the managed Ethernet switch or router is less
than 10 in 1 million packets.

Using a computer, it is possible to generate and monitor packets lost between the power supply and the
AP/SM. This can be achieved by executing the Command Prompt application which is supplied as
standard with Windows and Mac operating systems.

This procedure disrupts network traffic carried by the device under test.

Procedure:

1. Ensure that the IP address of the computer is configured appropriately for connection to the device
under test, and does not conflict with other devices connected to the network.
2. If the power supply is connected to an Ethernet switch or router then connect the computer to a
spare port, if available.
3. If it is not possible to connect the computer to a spare port of an Ethernet switch or router, then the
power supply must be disconnected from the network in order to execute this test:
• Disconnect the power supply from the network.
• Connect the computer directly to the LAN port of the power supply.
4. On the computer, open the Command Prompt application.
5. Send 1000 ping packets of length 1500 bytes. The process will take 1000 seconds, which is
approximately 17 minutes.
If the computer is running a Windows operating system, this is achieved by typing (for an IPv6
address, use the ping6 command):

ping –n 1000 –l 1500 <ipaddress>

where <ipaddress> is the IP address of the AP or SM under test.

If the computer is running a MAC operating system, this is achieved by typing:

PAGE 5-5
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND TESTING HARDWARE
TROUBLESHOOTING

ping –c 1000 –s 1492 <ipaddress>

where <ipaddress> is the IP address of the AP/SM under test.

6. Record how many Ping packets are lost. This is reported by Command Prompt on completion of the
test.
The test has passed if the number of lost packets is less than 2.

PAGE 5-6
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING THE RADIO LINK
TROUBLESHOOTING

This section describes how to test the link when there is no radio communication, when it is unreliable,
or when the data throughput rate is too low. It may be necessary to test both ends of the link.

If there is no wireless activity, follow the below procedure:

Procedure:

1 Check that the devices are configured with the same Frequency Carrier.

2 Check that the Channel Bandwidth is configured the same at both ends of the link.

3 On the Access Point, verify that the Max Range setting is configured to a distance slightly greater
than the distance between the Access Point and the other end of the link.

4 Check that the Access Point Synchronization Source is configured properly based on the network
configuration.

5 Verify the authentication settings on the devices. if Authentication Type is set to WPA2, verify that
the Pre-shared Key matches between the Access Point and the Subscriber Module Preferred
Access Points List.

6 Check that the software at each end of the link is the same version.

7 Check that the desired Access Point SSID is configured in the Subscriber Module Preferred Access
Points List.

8 On the Subscriber Module, check the DL RSSI and DL CINR values. Verify that for the Subscriber
Module installed distance, that the values are consistent with the values reported by the
LINKPlanner tool.

9 Check Tx Power on the devices

10 Check that the link is not obstructed or misaligned.

11 Check the DFS status page (Monitor, System Status) at each end of the link and establish that
there is a quiet wireless channel to use.

12 If there are no faults found in the configuration and there is absolutely no wireless signal, retry the
installation procedure.

13 If this does not work then report a suspected device fault to Cambium Networks.

PAGE 5-7
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING THE RADIO LINK
TROUBLESHOOTING

For any Force 300-16 units exhibiting frequent disconnects or reboots, the 4.4 official release must be
applied twice to ensure both banks are updated. Once completed, please make sure both banks are
running 4.4 under Monitor → System. In general, this practice can be followed for all 802.11ac models as
they support two banks for software storage.

If there is some activity but the link is unreliable or does not achieve the data rates required, proceed as
follows:

Procedure:

1 Check that the interference has not increased by monitoring the uplink and downlink CINR values
reported in the Access Point page Monitor > Wireless Status

2 Check that the RSSI values reported at the device are proper based on the distance of the link –
the LINKPlanner tool is designed to estimate these values.

3 Check that the path loss is low enough for the communication rates required.

4 Check that the device has not become misaligned.

5 Review your Quality of Service configuration and ensure that traffic is properly classified and
prioritized.

PAGE 5-8
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND RESETTING EPMP TO FACTORY DEFAULTS
TROUBLESHOOTING BY POWER CYCLING

Operators may reset an ePMP radio to the default factory configuration by a sequence of power cycling
(removing and re-applying power to the device). This procedure allows operators to perform a factory
default reset without a tower climb or additional tools. The procedure is depicted in Figure 63.

Procedure:

1 Remove the Ethernet cable from the PoE jack of the power supply for at least 10 seconds.

2 Reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds and disconnect
the cable to power off the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds. (1st power cycle)

3 Reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds and disconnect
the cable to power off the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds. (2nd power cycle)

4 Reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds and disconnect
the cable to power off the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds. (3rd power cycle)

5 Reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds and disconnect
the cable to power off the ePMP device for 3-5 seconds. (4th power cycle)

6 Reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the ePMP device for at least 30 seconds and
allow it to go through the boot-up procedure (Note: Device will go through an additional reset
automatically). This will reset the current configuration files to factory default configuration (e.g. IP
addresses, Device mode, RF configuration, etc.). The device can be pinged from a PC to check if
boot-up is complete (Successful ping replies indicate boot-up is complete).

7 Access the ePMP device using the default IP address of 192.168.0.1 (AP) or 192.168.0.2 (SM).

Figure 63 Power cycle timings

PAGE 5-9
CHAPTER 5: OPERATION AND RESETTING EPMP TO FACTORY DEFAULTS
TROUBLESHOOTING BY POWER CYCLING

Where: Is:

V+(ON) Power through PoE has been applied to the device

Off Power through PoE has been removed from the

device

ton The time duration for which the device has been
powered on. This should be 3-5 seconds.

toff The time duration for which the device has been
powered off. This should be 3-5 seconds.

PAGE 5-10
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE RESETTING EPMP TO FACTORY DEFAULTS
INFORMATION BY POWER CYCLING

Chapter 6: Legal and Reference Information

This chapter provides legal notices including software license agreements.

Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be

made unless under the express consent of the party responsible for compliance. Any
such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and will
void the manufacturer’s warranty.

The following topics are described in this chapter:

• Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 6-2

• Hardware warranty on page 6-61
• Limit of liability on page 6-61
• Compliance with safety standards on page 6-61 lists the safety specifications against which the
ePMP has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.
• Compliance with radio regulations on page 6-73 describes how the ePMP complies with the radio
regulations that are enforced in various countries.
• Notifications on page 6-76 contain notes made to regulatory bodies for the ePMP.

PAGE 6-1
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

In connection with Cambium Networks’ delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing
embedded or pre-loaded proprietary software, or both, Cambium Networks is willing to license this
certain proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that
you accept all the terms in this End User License Agreement (“Agreement”).

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR
INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, YOU MAY, FOR A FULL REFUND, RETURN THIS PRODUCT TO
THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF
ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
USE ON THE PRODUCT, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT.

In this Agreement, the word “Software” refers to the set of instructions for computers, in executable
form and in any media, (which may include diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet, hardware, or
firmware) licensed to you. The word “Documentation” refers to electronic or printed manuals and
accompanying instructional aids licensed to you. The word “Product” refers to Cambium Networks’
fixed wireless broadband devices for which the Software and Documentation are licensed for use.

Cambium Networks Limited (“Cambium”) grants you (“Licensee” or “you”) a personal, nonexclusive,
non-transferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to the Conditions of Use set
forth in “Conditions of use” and the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any terms or conditions
relating to the Software and Documentation appearing on the face or reverse side of any purchase
order, purchase order acknowledgment or other order document that are different from, or in addition
to, the terms of this Agreement will not be binding on the parties, even if payment is accepted.

Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement is
strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement.

1. Only you, your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation. You will take all
necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement.

2. You will use the Software and Documentation (i) only for your internal business purposes; (ii) only as
described in the Software and Documentation; and (iii) in strict accordance with this Agreement.

3. You may use the Software and Documentation, provided that the use is in conformance with the
terms set forth in this Agreement.

PAGE 6-2
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

4. Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws,
international treaty provisions, and other applicable laws. Therefore, you must treat the Software like
any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording) except that you may either:
(i) make 1 copy of the transportable part of the Software (which typically is supplied on diskette, CD-
ROM, or downloadable internet), solely for back-up purposes; or (ii) copy the transportable part of the
Software to a PC hard disk, provided you keep the original solely for back-up purposes. If the
Documentation is in printed form, it may not be copied. If the Documentation is in electronic form, you
may print out 1 copy, which then may not be copied. With regard to the copy made for backup or
archival purposes, you agree to reproduce any Cambium Networks copyright notice, and other
proprietary legends appearing thereon. Such copyright notice(s) may appear in any of several forms,
including machine-readable form, and you agree to reproduce such notice in each form in which it
appears, to the extent it is physically possible to do so. Unauthorized duplication of the Software or
Documentation constitutes copyright infringement, and in the United States is punishable in federal
court by fine and imprisonment.

5. You will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any product, technical data or software to any country for
which the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental approval without
first obtaining such license or approval.

If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside of
the terms of this agreement, your license is automatically terminated. Title and copyrights to the
Software and Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Cambium Networks and its
licensors. You will not, and will not permit others to: (i) modify, translate, decompile, bootleg, reverse
engineer, disassemble, or extract the inner workings of the Software or Documentation, (ii) copy the
look-and-feel or functionality of the Software or Documentation; (iii) remove any proprietary notices,
marks, labels, or logos from the Software or Documentation; (iv) rent or transfer all or some of the
Software or Documentation to any other party without Cambium’s prior written consent; or (v) utilize
any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat any copy protection device, should the
Software and Documentation be equipped with such a protection device. If the Software and
Documentation is provided on multiple types of media (such as diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable
internet), then you will only use the medium which best meets your specific needs, and will not loan,
rent, lease, or transfer the other media contained in the package without Cambium’s written consent.
Unauthorized copying of the Software or Documentation, or failure to comply with any of the provisions
of this Agreement, will result in automatic termination of this license.

PAGE 6-3
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information and
trade secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will result in
irreparable harm to Cambium Networks for which monetary damages would be inadequate and for
which Cambium Networks will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief. If applicable, you will limit
access to the Software and Documentation to those of your employees and agents who need to use the
Software and Documentation for your internal business purposes, and you will take appropriate action
with those employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation,
using the same degree of care to avoid unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the
protection of your own proprietary software, but in no event less than reasonable care.

You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that: (i) was in the
public domain at the time of disclosure; (ii) entered the public domain through no fault of yours; (iii) was
given to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential; (iv) is independently developed by you; or (v)
is disclosed as required by law provided that you notify Cambium Networks prior to such disclosure and
provide Cambium Networks with a reasonable opportunity to respond.

Except as required in “Conditions of use”, you will not, during the term of this Agreement or thereafter,
use any trademark of Cambium Networks, or any word or symbol likely to be confused with any
Cambium Networks trademark, either alone or in any combination with another word or words.

The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express written
consent of Cambium Networks, regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished by physical
or electronic means. Cambium’s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned
upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement.

During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product, or during the term of any executed Maintenance
and Support Agreement for the Product, you are entitled to receive Updates. An “Update” means any
code in any form which is a bug fix, patch, error correction, or minor enhancement, but excludes any
major feature added to the Software. Updates are available for download at the support website.

Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee. If Cambium Networks
makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided, then the
terms of this Agreement will apply.

Except as provided above, Cambium Networks is not responsible for maintenance or field service of the
Software under this Agreement.

PAGE 6-4
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

CAMBIUM NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
STATUTORY, OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU. CAMBIUM NETWORKS SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILTY,
NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” CAMBIUM NETWORKS DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.
CAMBIUM NETWORKS MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,
OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. Some jurisdictions do not allow the
exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR OTHER
DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR FROM ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S
LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT.

If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U.S. Government, the following
applies. Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to the restrictions
set forth in subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights
clause at FAR 52.227-19 (JUNE 1987), if applicable, unless being provided to the Department of Defense.
If being provided to the Department of Defense, use, duplication, or disclosure of the Products is subject
to the restricted rights set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), if applicable. Software and
Documentation may or may not include a Restricted Rights notice, or other notice referring specifically
to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The terms and conditions of this Agreement will each
continue to apply, but only to the extent that such terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the
rights provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the FAR and DFARS, as applicable to the
particular procuring agency and procurement transaction.

PAGE 6-5
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows. Your right to use
the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by you. Within
30 days after termination of this Agreement, you will certify to Cambium Networks in writing that
through your best efforts, and to the best of your knowledge, the original and all copies, in whole or in
part, in any form, of the Software and all related material and Documentation, have been destroyed,
except that, with prior written consent from Cambium Networks, you may retain one copy for archival
or backup purposes. You may not sublicense, assign or transfer the license or the Product, except as
expressly provided in this Agreement. Any attempt to otherwise sublicense, assign or transfer any of the
rights, duties or obligations hereunder is null and void.

This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply
and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois.

This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium’s prior written consent.

The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the term of
this Agreement, then it will survive.

This agreement contains the parties’ entire agreement regarding your use of the Software and may be
amended only in writing signed by both parties, except that Cambium Networks may modify this
Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws.

The software may contain one or more items of Third-Party Software supplied by other third-party
suppliers. The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third-Party Software UNLESS A
SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED, IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY LICENSE.

PAGE 6-6
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

Where required under the terms of the open source software license applicable to Cambium’s use of
each of the following open source software packages, for at least three (3) years from the date of your
receipt of the copy of such open source software, Cambium will provide to any party who contacts us at
the contact information provided below a copy of the source code for the version of the requested
open source software used in this Cambium product.

Cambium Networks

Atrium, 3800 Golf Rd #360

Rolling Meadows, IL 60008

QCA

Tensilica

Linux Kernel
OpenWRT " GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not

price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid

anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether

gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.

PAGE 6-7
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software

patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and

modification follow.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION

0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains

a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License. The ""Program"", below,
refers to any such program or work, and a ""work based on the Program""
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term ""modification"".) Each licensee is addressed as ""you"".

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not

covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's

source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:

a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices

stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

PAGE 6-8
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.

c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively

when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If

identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest

your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program

with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.

3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:

a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable

source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three

years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,

c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer

to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any

PAGE 6-9
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to

control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering

access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program

except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent

infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under

any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any

patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the

PAGE 6-10
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

integrity of the free software distribution system, which is

implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to

be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in

certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program

specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ""any
later version"", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software
Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promo"

u-boot Copyright (C) Copyright 2000 – 2005

Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, [email protected].

See file CREDITS for list of people who contributed to this project.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the
# GNU General Public License for more details.
#
# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
# MA 02111-1307 USA
"

PAGE 6-11
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

firewall /*
* firewall3 - 3rd OpenWrt UCI firewall implementation
*
* Copyright (C) 2013-2014 Jo-Philipp Wich <[email protected]>
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
*/

fstools /*
* Copyright (C) 2014 John Crispin <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1
* as published by the Free Software Foundation
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*/

iputils /*
* Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California.
* All rights reserved.
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
* Mike Muuss.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* This product includes software developed by the University of
* California, Berkeley and its contributors.
* 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
* may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
* without specific prior written permission.
*

PAGE 6-12
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS

``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*/
/*
*
* Modified for AF_INET6 by Pedro Roque
*
* <[email protected]>
*
* Original copyright notice included bellow
*/

/*
* Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California.
* All rights reserved.
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
* Mike Muuss.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* This product includes software developed by the University of
* California, Berkeley and its contributors.
* 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
* may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
* without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE

PAGE 6-13
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*/

jsonfilter /*
* Copyright (C) 2013-2014 Jo-Philipp Wich <[email protected]>
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
*/

klish
Overview
This package contains code which is copyrighted to multiple sources.

============================================================
====================
3Com Corporation
The intial public release of this software was developed by Graeme McKerrell
whilst in the employment of 3Com Europe Ltd.

Copyright (c) 2005, 3Com Corporation

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice,

PAGE 6-14
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of 3Com Corporation nor the names of its contributors
may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without
specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

============================================================
====================
Newport Networks Ltd.
The 0.6-0.7 releases of this software was developed by Graeme McKerrell
whilst in the
employment of Newport Networks Ltd.
As well as enhancing the existing code the new modules were developed.

Copyright (c) 2005,2006, Newport Networks Ltd

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Newport Networks Ltd nor the names of its
contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without
specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PAGE 6-15
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

============================================================
====================
Serj Kalichev
The klish is a fork of original clish.

Copyright (c) 2010 Serj Kalichev.

All Rights Reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

PAGE 6-16
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

librpc /*
* Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for
* unrestricted use provided that this legend is included on all tape
* media and as a part of the software program in whole or part. Users
* may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized
* to license or distribute it to anyone else except as part of a product or
* program developed by the user.
*
* SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING THE
* WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE
PRACTICE.
*
* Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the
* part of Sun Microsystems, Inc. to assist in its use, correction,
* modification or enhancement.
*
* SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO
THE
* INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY
SUN RPC
* OR ANY PART THEREOF.
*
* In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue
* or profits or other special, indirect and consequential damages, even if
* Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
*
* Sun Microsystems, Inc.
* 2550 Garcia Avenue
* Mountain View, California 94043
*/
/*
* Copyright (C) 1984, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
*/

libubox /*
* Copyright (C) 2010-2012 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
*/

PAGE 6-17
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

lua Lua License

-----------

Lua is licensed under the terms of the MIT license reproduced below.
This means that Lua is free software and can be used for both academic
and commercial purposes at absolutely no cost.

For details and rationale, see http://www.lua.org/license.html .

============================================================
===================

Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy

of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.

============================================================
===================

(end of COPYRIGHT)

LuaSrcDiet LuaSrcDiet License

------------------

LuaSrcDiet is licensed under the terms of the MIT license reproduced

below. This means that LuaSrcDiet is free software and can be used for
both academic and commercial purposes at absolutely no cost.

Think of LuaSrcDiet as a compiler or a text filter; whatever that is

processed by LuaSrcDiet is not affected by its license. It does not add
anything new into your source code; it only transforms code that already
exist.

Hence, there is no need to tag this license onto Lua programs that are
only processed. Given the liberal terms of this kind of license, the
primary purpose is just to claim authorship of LuaSrcDiet.

Parts of LuaSrcDiet is based on Lua 5 code. See the file COPYRIGHT_Lua51

PAGE 6-18
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

(Lua 5.1.4) for Lua 5's license.

============================================================
===================

Copyright (C) 2005-2008,2011 Kein-Hong Man <[email protected]>

Lua 5.1.4 Copyright (C) 1994-2008 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy

of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.

============================================================
===================

(end of COPYRIGHT)

lzma LZMA SDK 4.65

-------------

LZMA SDK provides the documentation, samples, header files, libraries,

and tools you need to develop applications that use LZMA compression.

LZMA is default and general compression method of 7z format

in 7-Zip compression program (www.7-zip.org). LZMA provides high
compression ratio and very fast decompression.

LZMA is an improved version of famous LZ77 compression algorithm.

It was improved in way of maximum increasing of compression ratio,
keeping high decompression speed and low memory requirements for
decompressing.

LICENSE
-------

LZMA SDK is written and placed in the public domain by Igor Pavlov.

PAGE 6-19
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

LZMA SDK Contents

-----------------

LZMA SDK includes:

- ANSI-C/C++/C#/Java source code for LZMA compressing and

decompressing
- Compiled file->file LZMA compressing/decompressing program for
Windows system

nat46 * Copyright (c) 2013-2014 Andrew Yourtchenko <[email protected]>

*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2
* as published by the Free Software Foundation
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.

netifd /*
* netifd - network interface daemon
* Copyright (C) 2012 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2
* as published by the Free Software Foundation
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*/

procd /*
* Copyright (C) 2013 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
* Copyright (C) 2013 John Crispin <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1
* as published by the Free Software Foundation
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*/

rpcd /*
* rpcd - UBUS RPC server
*
* Copyright (C) 2013 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
* Copyright (C) 2013-2014 Jo-Philipp Wich <[email protected]>
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES

PAGE 6-20
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
*/

ubox /*
* Copyright (C) 2013 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
* Copyright (C) 2013 John Crispin <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1
* as published by the Free Software Foundation
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*/

ubus /*
* Copyright (C) 2011-2014 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1
* as published by the Free Software Foundation
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*/

uci /*
* libuci - Library for the Unified Configuration Interface
* Copyright (C) 2008 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1
* as published by the Free Software Foundation
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
*/

uClibc++ /* Copyright (C) 2004 Garrett A. Kajmowicz

This file is part of the uClibc++ Library.

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or

modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either

PAGE 6-21
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the GNU
Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307
USA

*/

uhttpd /*
* uhttpd - Tiny single-threaded httpd
*
* Copyright (C) 2010-2013 Jo-Philipp Wich <[email protected]>
* Copyright (C) 2013 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
*/

usign /*
* usign - tiny signify replacement
*
* Copyright (C) 2015 Felix Fietkau <[email protected]>
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,

PAGE 6-22
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

ARISING OUT OF
* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
*/

attr /*
* Copyright (c) 2001-2003,2005 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
* All Rights Reserved.
*
* This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it
* under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published
* by the Free Software Foundation, either version 2.1 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
* along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
*/

bc /* A Bison parser, made by GNU Bison 2.1. */

/* Skeleton parser for Yacc-like parsing with Bison,

Copyright (C) 1984, 1989, 1990, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free
Software Foundation, Inc.

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify

it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. */

/* As a special exception, when this file is copied by Bison into a

Bison output file, you may use that output file without restriction.
This special exception was added by the Free Software Foundation
in version 1.24 of Bison. */

/* Written by Richard Stallman by simplifying the original so called

``semantic'' parser. */

/* All symbols defined below should begin with yy or YY, to avoid

infringing on user name space. This should be done even for local
variables, as they might otherwise be expanded by user macros.
There are some unavoidable exceptions within include files to
define necessary library symbols; they are noted "INFRINGES ON
USER NAME SPACE" below. */

PAGE 6-23
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

bridge-utils /*
* Copyright (C) 2000 Lennert Buytenhek
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
* published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
* License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
* WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU
* General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
*/

busybox BusyBox is distributed under version 2 of the General Public License

(included
in its entirety, below). Version 2 is the only version of this license which
this version of BusyBox (or modified versions derived from this one) may be
distributed under.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

bzip2 This program, "bzip2", the associated library "libbzip2", and all
documentation, are copyright (C) 1996-2010 Julian R Seward. All
rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must

not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must

not be misrepresented as being the original software.

4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY

EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PAGE 6-24
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Julian Seward, [email protected]

bzip2/libbzip2 version 1.0.6 of 6 September 2010

conntrack-tools /*
* (C) 2006-2012 by Pablo Neira Ayuso <[email protected]>
* (C) 2011-2012 by Vyatta Inc <http://www.vyatta.com>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
*/

curl COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2015, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose
with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not

PAGE 6-25
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings

in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

device-agent /*

============================================================
================
Name : common.c
Author : Subi S S
Version :
Copyright : Copyright (C) 2013 Cambium Networks, Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL PROPRIETARY

Description : Functions which are useful for all platforms.

============================================================
================
*/

dnsmasq /* dnsmasq is Copyright (c) 2000-2015 Simon Kelley

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify

it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; version 2 dated June, 1991, or
(at your option) version 3 dated 29 June, 2007.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
*/

dropbear Dropbear contains a number of components from different sources, hence

there
are a few licenses and authors involved. All licenses are fairly
non-restrictive.

The majority of code is written by Matt Johnston, under the license below.

Portions of the client-mode work are (c) 2004 Mihnea Stoenescu, under the
same license:

Copyright (c) 2002-2014 Matt Johnston

Portions copyright (c) 2004 Mihnea Stoenescu
All rights reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy

of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.

PAGE 6-26
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.

=====

LibTomCrypt and LibTomMath are written by Tom St Denis, and are Public
Domain.

=====

sshpty.c is taken from OpenSSH 3.5p1,

Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <[email protected]>, Espoo, Finland
All rights reserved
"As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software
can be used freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this
software must be clearly marked as such, and if the derived work is
incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be
called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure Shell". "

=====

=====

loginrec.c
loginrec.h
atomicio.h
atomicio.c
and strlcat() (included in util.c) are from OpenSSH 3.6.1p2, and are licensed
under the 2 point BSD license.

loginrec is written primarily by Andre Lucas, atomicio.c by Theo de Raadt.

strlcat() is (c) Todd C. Miller

=====

Import code in keyimport.c is modified from PuTTY's import.c, licensed as

follows:

PuTTY is copyright 1997-2003 Simon Tatham.

Portions copyright Robert de Bath, Joris van Rantwijk, Delian

Delchev, Andreas Schultz, Jeroen Massar, Wez Furlong, Nicolas Barry,
Justin Bradford, and CORE SDI S.A.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person

obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,

PAGE 6-27
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,

publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be

included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.

=====

curve25519-donna:

/* Copyright 2008, Google Inc.

* All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
* met:
*
* * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
* copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
* in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
* * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its
* contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
* this software without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

PAGE 6-28
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
*
* curve25519-donna: Curve25519 elliptic curve, public key function
*
* http://code.google.com/p/curve25519-donna/
*
* Adam Langley <[email protected]>
*
* Derived from public domain C code by Daniel J. Bernstein <[email protected]>
*
* More information about curve25519 can be found here
* http://cr.yp.to/ecdh.html
*
* djb's sample implementation of curve25519 is written in a special assembly
* language called qhasm and uses the floating point registers.
*
* This is, almost, a clean room reimplementation from the curve25519 paper.
It
* uses many of the tricks described therein. Only the crecip function is taken
* from the sample implementation.
*/

ebtables /*
* ebtables.c, v2.0 July 2002
*
* Author: Bart De Schuymer
*
* This code was stongly inspired on the iptables code which is
* Copyright (C) 1999 Paul `Rusty' Russell & Michael J. Neuling
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
* published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
* License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
* WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU
* General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
*/

ethtool ethtool is available under the terms of the GNU Public License version 2.

See COPYING for details.

eventlog Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

PAGE 6-29
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of BalaBit nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY BALABIT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''

AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

expat Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

file $File: COPYING,v 1.1 2008/02/05 19:08:11 christos Exp $

Copyright (c) Ian F. Darwin 1986, 1987, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1995.
Software written by Ian F. Darwin and others;
maintained 1994- Christos Zoulas.

PAGE 6-30
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

This software is not subject to any export provision of the United States
Department of Commerce, and may be exported to any country or planet.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice immediately at the beginning of the file, without modification,
this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS

IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.

glib/glib2 GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is

numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]

haproxy HAPROXY's license - 2006/06/15

Historically, haproxy has been covered by GPL version 2. However, an issue

appeared in GPL which will prevent external non-GPL code from being built
using the headers provided with haproxy. My long-term goal is to build a core
system able to load external modules to support specific application
protocols.

Since some protocols are found in rare environments (finance, industry, ...),
some of them might be accessible only after signing an NDA. Enforcing GPL
on
such modules would only prevent them from ever being implemented, while
not
providing anything useful to ordinary users.

PAGE 6-31
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

For this reason, I *want* to be able to support binary only external modules
when needed, with a GPL core and GPL modules for standard protocols, so
that
people fixing bugs don't keep them secretly to try to stay over competition.

The solution was then to apply the LGPL license to the exportable include
files, while keeping the GPL for all the rest. This way, it still is mandatory
to redistribute modified code under customer request, but at the same time,
it
is expressly permitted to write, compile, link and load non-GPL code using the
LGPL header files and not to distribute them if it causes a legal problem.

Of course, users are strongly encouraged to continue the work under GPL as
long
as possible, since this license has allowed useful enhancements, contributions
and fixes from talented people around the world.

Due to the incompatibility between the GPL and the OpenSSL licence, you
must
apply the GPL/LGPL licence with the following exception:
This program is released under the GPL with the additional exemption that
compiling, linking, and/or using OpenSSL is allowed.

The text of the licenses lies in the "doc" directory. All the files provided in
this package are covered by the GPL unless expressly stated otherwise in
them.
Every patch or contribution provided by external people will by default
comply
with the license of the files it affects, or be rejected.

Willy Tarreau - [email protected]

i2c-tools GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
/*
i2cset.c - A user-space program to write an I2C register.
Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Frodo Looijaard <[email protected]>, and
Mark D. Studebaker <[email protected]>
Copyright (C) 2004-2012 Jean Delvare <[email protected]>

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify

it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston,
MA 02110-1301 USA.
*/

PAGE 6-32
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

iperf Copyright (c) 1999-2007, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois
All Rights Reserved.

Iperf performance test

Mark Gates
Ajay Tirumala
Jim Ferguson
Jon Dugan
Feng Qin
Kevin Gibbs
John Estabrook
National Laboratory for Applied Network Research
National Center for Supercomputing Applications
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy

of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimers.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this
list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
Software without specific prior written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED
"AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

iproute2 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
/*
* ip.c "ip" utility frontend.
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License

PAGE 6-33
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version

* 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* Authors: Alexey Kuznetsov, <[email protected]>
*/

iptables /*
* Author: [email protected] and [email protected]
*
* (C) 2000-2002 by the netfilter coreteam <[email protected]>:
* Paul 'Rusty' Russell <[email protected]>
* Marc Boucher <[email protected]>
* James Morris <[email protected]>
* Harald Welte <[email protected]>
* Jozsef Kadlecsik <[email protected]>
*
* Based on the ipchains code by Paul Russell and Michael Neuling
*
* iptables -- IP firewall administration for kernels with
* firewall table (aimed for the 2.3 kernels)
*
* See the accompanying manual page iptables(8) for information
* about proper usage of this program.
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See
the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
*/

iw Copyright (c) 2007, 2008 Johannes Berg

Copyright (c) 2007 Andy Lutomirski
Copyright (c) 2007 Mike Kershaw
Copyright (c) 2008-2009 Luis R. Rodriguez

Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY
DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF

PAGE 6-34
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS

SOFTWARE.

jansson Copyright (c) 2009-2014 Petri Lehtinen <[email protected]>

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy

of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.

json-c Copyright (c) 2009-2012 Eric Haszlakiewicz

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a

copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.

----------------------------------------------------------------

Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Metaparadigm Pte Ltd

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a

PAGE 6-35
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),

to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.

libelf /*
* elf_repl.h - public header file for systems that lack it.
* Copyright (C) 1995 - 2006 Michael Riepe
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
* version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU
* Library General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
*/

libevent Libevent is available for use under the following license, commonly known
as the 3-clause (or "modified") BSD license:

==============================
Copyright (c) 2000-2007 Niels Provos <[email protected]>
Copyright (c) 2007-2012 Niels Provos and Nick Mathewson

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

PAGE 6-36
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY

EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

==============================

Portions of Libevent are based on works by others, also made available by

them under the three-clause BSD license above. The copyright notices are
available in the corresponding source files; the license is as above. Here's
a list:

log.c:
Copyright (c) 2000 Dug Song <[email protected]>
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.

strlcpy.c:
Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <[email protected]>

win32select.c:
Copyright (c) 2003 Michael A. Davis <[email protected]>

evport.c:
Copyright (c) 2007 Sun Microsystems

ht-internal.h:
Copyright (c) 2002 Christopher Clark

minheap-internal.h:
Copyright (c) 2006 Maxim Yegorushkin <[email protected]>

==============================

The arc4module is available under the following, sometimes called the

"OpenBSD" license:

Copyright (c) 1996, David Mazieres <[email protected]>

Copyright (c) 2008, Damien Miller <[email protected]>

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES

PAGE 6-37
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.

libffi libffi - Copyright (c) 1996-2012 Anthony Green, Red Hat, Inc and others.
See source files for details.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
``Software''), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be

included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'', WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

/* -----------------------------------------------------------------------
ffi.c - Copyright (c) 1996, 1998, 1999, 2001, 2007, 2008 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright (c) 2002 Ranjit Mathew
Copyright (c) 2002 Bo Thorsen
Copyright (c) 2002 Roger Sayle
Copyright (C) 2008, 2010 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

x86 Foreign Function Interface

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
``Software''), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

PAGE 6-38
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'', WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

libiwinfo *
* iwinfo - Wireless Information Library - Broadcom wl.o Backend
*
* Copyright (C) 2009 Jo-Philipp Wich <[email protected]>
*
* The iwinfo library is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2
* as published by the Free Software Foundation.
*
* The iwinfo library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
* See the GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
* with the iwinfo library. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
*
* This code is based on the wlc.c utility published by OpenWrt.org .
*/

libnetfilter_conntrack /*
* (C) 2005-2011 by Pablo Neira Ayuso <[email protected]>
* Harald Welte <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
* under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*/

libnetfilter_cthelper GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

libnetfilter_cttimeout GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

PAGE 6-39
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

libnetfilter_queue GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

libnfnetlink GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

libnl GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
the version number 2.1.]

libpcap License: BSD

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

libwebsockets /*
* libwebsockets - small server side websockets and web server
implementation
*
* Copyright (C) 2010-2014 Andy Green <[email protected]>
*
* This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
* License as published by the Free Software Foundation:
* version 2.1 of the License.
*
* This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

PAGE 6-40
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of

* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU
* Lesser General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
* License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston,
* MA 02110-1301 USA
*/

libxml2 Except where otherwise noted in the source code (e.g. the files hash.c,
list.c and the trio files, which are covered by a similar licence but
with different Copyright notices) all the files are:

Copyright (C) 1998-2012 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy

of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur-
nished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.

lighttpd Copyright (c) 2004, Jan Kneschke, incremental

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

- Neither the name of the 'incremental' nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

PAGE 6-41
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Linux-PAM Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated the following text describes the
licensed conditions under which the contents of this Linux-PAM release
may be distributed:

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux-PAM, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright

notice, and this entire permission notice in its entirety,
including the disclaimer of warranties.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current

copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.

3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote

products derived from this software without their specific prior
written permission.

ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the

GNU General Public License, in which case the provisions of the GNU
GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above restrictions. (This clause is
necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the
restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND

PAGE 6-42
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------

lldpd License
-------

lldpd is distributed under the ISC license:

> Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
> purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
> copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
>
> THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
> WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
> MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
> ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
> WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
> ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
> OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.

Also, `lldpcli` will be linked to GNU Readline (which is GPL licensed)

if available. To avoid this, use `--without-readline` as a configure
option.
/*
* Copyright (c) 2008 Vincent Bernat <[email protected]>
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
* copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES
* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR
* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES
* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF
* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
*/

PAGE 6-43
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

lua-cjson Copyright (c) 2010-2012 Mark Pulford <[email protected]>

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be

included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

mcproxy GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

minicom Minicom is Copyright (C) 1991,1992,1993,1994,1995,1996

Miquel van Smoorenburg.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

miniupnpd MiniUPnPd
Copyright (c) 2006-2015, Thomas BERNARD
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products

PAGE 6-44
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

mtd-utils GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

net-snmp Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate

parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.

---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----

Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University

Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000

Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California

All Rights Reserved

Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.

CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM

ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY

PAGE 6-45
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----

Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband

Ltd.
All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

PAGE 6-46
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND

ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.

Use is subject to license terms below.

This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.

Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the

names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PAGE 6-47
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2003-2011, Sparta, Inc

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----

Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network

Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.

PAGE 6-48
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and

Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----
-

Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003

[email protected]
Author: Bernhard Penz <[email protected]>

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its

subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

PAGE 6-49
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND

ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

odhcp6c GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

odhcpd GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

openssl LICENSE ISSUES

==============

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a double license, i.e. both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL
please contact [email protected].

OpenSSL License
---------------

/*
============================================================
========
* Copyright (c) 1998-2017 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

PAGE 6-50
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used
to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* [email protected].
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND
ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
============================================================
========
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*
*/

Original SSLeay License

-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])
* All rights reserved.
*

PAGE 6-51
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* This package is an SSL implementation written

* by Eric Young ([email protected]).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young ([email protected])"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
([email protected])"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

PAGE 6-52
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/

opkg GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

pcre Release 8 of PCRE is distributed under the terms of the "BSD" licence, as
specified below. The documentation for PCRE, supplied in the "doc"
directory, is distributed under the same terms as the software itself.
THE MAIN PCRE LIBRARY
---------------------
Written by: Philip Hazel
Email local part: ph10
Email domain: cam.ac.uk
University of Cambridge Computing Service,
Cambridge, England.
Copyright (c) 1997-2010 University of Cambridge
All rights reserved

THE C++ WRAPPER LIBRARY

-----------------------
Written by: Google Inc.
Copyright (c) 2007-2010 Google Inc
All rights reserved

pm-utils GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
/*
* suspend functions for machines with Mac-style pmu
*
* Copyright 2006 Red Hat, Inc.
*
* Based on work from:
* Peter Jones <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of version 2 of the GNU General Public License as
* published by the Free Software Foundation.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA

PAGE 6-53
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

*
*/

ppp

rng-tools GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110-1335 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
* rngd.c -- Random Number Generator daemon
*
* rngd reads data from a hardware random number generator, verifies it
* looks like random data, and adds it to /dev/random's entropy store.
*
* In theory, this should allow you to read very quickly from
* /dev/random; rngd also adds bytes to the entropy store periodically
* when it's full, which makes predicting the entropy store's contents
* harder.
*
* Copyright (C) 2001 Philipp Rumpf
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Suite 500, Boston, MA 02110-1335 USA
*/

rp-pppoe GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
/***********************************************************************
*
* pppoe.c
*
* Implementation of user-space PPPoE redirector for Linux.
*
* Copyright (C) 2000-2012 by Roaring Penguin Software Inc.
*
* This program may be distributed according to the terms of the GNU
* General Public License, version 2 or (at your option) any later version.

PAGE 6-54
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

*
* LIC: GPL

rstp GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
/*****************************************************************************
Copyright (c) 2006 EMC Corporation.

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it

under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for
more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with
this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.

The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the
file called LICENSE.

Authors: Srinivas Aji <[email protected]>

squashfs GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
* Squashfs
*
* Copyright (c) 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
* Phillip Lougher <[email protected]>
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
* modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
* as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2,
* or (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
* GNU General Public License for more details.
*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License

PAGE 6-55
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software

* Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.

strace /*
* Copyright (c) 1991, 1992 Paul Kranenburg <[email protected]>
* Copyright (c) 1993 Branko Lankester <[email protected]>
* Copyright (c) 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 Rick Sladkey <[email protected]>
* Copyright (c) 1996-1999 Wichert Akkerman <[email protected]>
* All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
* derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES
* OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED.
* IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT,
* INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF
* THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
*/

syslog-ng Copyright (c) 2002-2015 Balabit

Copyright (c) 1996-2015 Balázs Scheidler

syslog-ng is licensed under the combination of the GPL and LGPL licenses.

The syslog-ng core contained in the following subdirectories

is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version
(please refer to the file LGPL.txt for more details):

lib/
libtest/
syslog-ng/
modules/java-common/
modules/java/(native|proxies|src)/

PAGE 6-56
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

modules/native/
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU
Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA

sysstat GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
* (C) 1998-2015 by Sebastien GODARD (sysstat <at> orange.fr)
*
***************************************************************************
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it *
* under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the *
* Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your *
* option) any later version. *
* *
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but *
* WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY *
* or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License *
* for more details. *
* *
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along *
* with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., *
* 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA *
***************************************************************************
*/

tcpdump License: BSD

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR

PAGE 6-57
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
/*
* Copyright (c) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 2000
* The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that: (1) source code distributions
* retain the above copyright notice and this paragraph in its entirety, (2)
* distributions including binary code include the above copyright notice and
* this paragraph in its entirety in the documentation or other materials
* provided with the distribution, and (3) all advertising materials mentioning
* features or use of this software display the following acknowledgement:
* ``This product includes software developed by the University of California,
* Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.'' Neither the name of
* the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
* or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
* written permission.
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED
* WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
*
* Support for splitting captures into multiple files with a maximum
* file size:
*
* Copyright (c) 2001
* Seth Webster <[email protected]>
*/

trace-cmd GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The applications are licensed under the GNU General Public License 2.0
(see COPYING) and the libraries are licensed under the GNU
Lesser General Public License 2.1 (See COPYING.LIB).

ubi-utils GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
/*
* Copyright (c) International Business Machines Corp., 2006
*
* This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
* it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
* the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
* (at your option) any later version.
*
* This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
* but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
* MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See

PAGE 6-58
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

* the GNU General Public License for more details.

*
* You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
* along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
* Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
*/

/*
* An utility to create UBI volumes.
*
* Authors: Artem Bityutskiy <[email protected]>
* Frank Haverkamp <[email protected]>
*/
Copyright (c) 2000-2007 by Nicolas Devillard.
MIT License

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a

copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

uClibc-ng GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999

Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
the version number 2.1.]

wget GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
/* Miscellaneous declarations.

PAGE 6-59
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

This file is part of GNU Wget.

GNU Wget is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify

it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.

GNU Wget is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with Wget; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.

In addition, as a special exception, the Free Software Foundation

gives permission to link the code of its release of Wget with the
OpenSSL project's "OpenSSL" library (or with modified versions of it
that use the same license as the "OpenSSL" library), and distribute
the linked executables. You must obey the GNU General Public License
in all respects for all of the code used other than "OpenSSL". If you
modify this file, you may extend this exception to your version of the
file, but you are not obligated to do so. If you do not wish to do
so, delete this exception statement from your version. */

wireless_tools.29 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

xtables-addons GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

zlib /* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library

version 1.2.8, April 28th, 2013

Copyright (C) 1995-2013 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler

This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied

warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose,

including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not
claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.

PAGE 6-60
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE CAMBIUM NETWORKS END USER LICENSE
INFORMATION AGREEMENT

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler

[email protected] [email protected]

The data format used by the zlib library is described by RFCs (Request for
Comments) 1950 to 1952 in the files http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1950
(zlib format), rfc1951 (deflate format) and rfc1952 (gzip format).
*/

Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium
Networks or a Cambium Point-To-Multipoint Distributor. Cambium Networks warrants that hardware will
conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium Networks shall within this time, at its own option,
either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product.
Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty (30)
days.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR OTHER
DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR FROM ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S
LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT.

For up-to-date data, refer to:

• LINKPlanner

PAGE 6-61
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

This section lists the safety specifications against which the ePMP has been tested and certified. It also
describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.

The ePMP hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety specifications listed in Table
6-1.

Table 6-1 ePMP safety compliance specifications

Region Standard

USA UL 60950-1, 2nd Edition

Canada CSA C22.2 No.60950 2nd Edition

International International CB certified and certified to IEC 60950-1:2005

(modified) plus EN60950-1:2006 + A1:2010

The ePMP complies with European EMC Specification EN301 489-1 with testing carried out to the
detailed requirements of EN301 489-4.

The EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for ePMP are listed under Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 EMC emissions compliance

Region Specification (Type Approvals)

USA FCC CFR 47 Part 15 class B

Canada RSS210, Issue 8

RSS247, Issue 1 (May 2015)

Europe ETSI EN301 489-4

PAGE 6-62
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:

• ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio
Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.

• Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national regulations.

• Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on the
minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from
physical agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1)
of Directive 89/391/EEC).

• US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site http://www.fcc.gov and the policies,
guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, as well as the
guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65.
• Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site http://www.hc-
sc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/limits-limites_e.html and Safety Code 6.
• EN 50383:2016 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic field
strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base Subscriber Modules and fixed
terminal Subscriber Modules for wireless telecommunication systems (110 MHz - 40 GHz).
• BS EN 50385:2017 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base Subscriber
Modules and fixed terminal Subscriber Modules for wireless telecommunication systems with the
basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency
electromagnetic fields (110 MHz – 40 GHz) – general public.
• ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines for the general
public. See the ICNIRP web site http://www.icnirp.de/ and Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to
Time-Varying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields.

Install the radios for the ePMP family of PMP wireless solutions so as to provide and maintain the
minimum separation distances from all persons.

The applicable power density exposure limit from the standards (see Human exposure to radio
frequency energy on page 6-63) is:

• 10 W/m2 for RF energy in the 5 GHz frequency band.

PAGE 6-63
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as follows:

The following calculation is based on the ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991 method, as that
provides a worst case analysis. Details of the assessment to EN50383:2002 can be
provided, if required.

P .G
S=
4 d 2

Where: Is:

S power density in W/m2

P maximum average transmit power

capability of the radio, in W

G total Tx gain as a factor, converted from

dB

d distance from point source, in m

Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields:

P.G
d=
4 .S

The calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances and resulting margins for each
frequency band and antenna combination is shown in the tables below. These are conservative
distances that include compliance margins. At these and greater separation distances, the power
density from the RF field is below generally accepted limits for the general population.

Explanation of terms used:

Tx burst – maximum average transmit power in burst (Watt)

P – maximum average transmit power capability of the radio (Watt)

G – total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB

S – power density (W/m2)

d – minimum distance from point source (meters)

R – recommended distances (meters)

PAGE 6-64
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Table 6-3 through Table 6-15 below list the power compliance margins for the following ePMP 3000
Access Point devices:

Part Number FCC ID Industry Canada

C058910A102A Z8H89FT0024 109W-0024

C050910A104A

Table 6-3 ePMP 3000 Access Point Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz, FCC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S (W/m2) d (m) R (m)

Type Bandwidth

AP 20 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.031 63 10 0.12 0.3

AP 80 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.018 63 10 0.09 0.1

Table 6-4 ePMP 3000 Access Point Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz, FCC

Conn Type Channel Antenna P (W) G S (W/m2) d (m) R (m)

Bandwidth

AP 20 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.062 63 10 0.18 0.3

AP 80 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.017 63 10 0.09 0.1

Table 6-5 ePMP 3000 Access Point Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz, ISEDC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S (W/m2) d (m) R (m) S @ 20 cm

Type Bandwidth (W/m2)

AP 20 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.062 63 9.69 0.18 0.3 7.72

AP 80 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.017 63 9.69 0.10 0.3 2.20

Gain of antenna in dBi = 10*log (G).

The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power
in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging.

At EU 5.8 GHz the products are generally limited to a fixed EIRP which can be achieved
with the Integrated Antenna. The calculations above assume that the maximum EIRP
allowed by the regulations is being transmitted.

PAGE 6-65
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Table 6-6 ePMP 3000 Access Point Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz (EIRP 36 dBm)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R (m)

Type Bandwidth (W/m2)

AP 20 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.063 63 10 0.18 0.3

AP 80 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 0.063 63 10 0.18 0.3

If there are no EIRP limits in the country of installation, use the distance calculations in
Table 6-7 and Table 6-8.

Table 6-7 ePMP 3000 Access Point Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz (full Tx power)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S (W/m2) d (m) R (m)

Type Bandwidth

AP 20 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 1.585 63 10 1.41 2.0

AP 80 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 1.585 63 10 1.41 2.0

Table 6-8 ePMP 3000 Access Point Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz (full Tx power)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R

Type Bandwidth (m)
(W/m2)

AP 20 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 1.585 63 10 1.41 2.0

AP 80 MHz Sector, 18 dBi 1.585 63 10 1.41 2.0

Table 6-9 through Table 6-12 below list the power compliance margins for the following Force 300-25
devices:

Part Number FCC ID Industry Canada

C058910C102A Z8H89FT0017 109W-0017

C050910C104A

Table 6-9 Force 300-25 Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz, FCC

Conn Channel P (W) G S d R

Antenna
Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (m) (m)

PTP 20 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.000389 316 10 0.03 0.1

SM

PAGE 6-66
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Conn Channel P (W) G S d R

Antenna
Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (m) (m)

PTP 80 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.000141 316 10 0.02 0.1

SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.957194 2 10 0.11 0.3

SM

PTP 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.058614 2 10 0.03 0.1

SM

Table 6-10 Force 300-25 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz, FCC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S D R

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (m) (m)

PTP 20 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.001660 316 10 0.06 0.1

SM

PTP 80 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.000719 316 10 0.04 0.1

SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.997700 2 10 0.11 0.3

SM

PTP/ 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.276058 2 10 0.06 0.1

SM

Table 6-11 Force 300-25 Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz, ISEDC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R (m) S @ 20 cm

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Integrated Dish, 0.000389 316 9.01 0.03 0.1 0.24
25 dBi
SM

PTP 80 MHz Integrated Dish, 0.000141 316 9.01 0.02 0.1 0.09
25 dBi
SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.957194 2 9.01 0.12 0.3 3.02

SM

PTP 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.058614 2 9.01 0.03 0.1 0.18

SM

PAGE 6-67
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Table 6-12 Force 300-25 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz, ISEDC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R (m) S @ 20 cm

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 0.001660 316 9.69 0.07 0.1 1.04
dBi
SM

PTP 80 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 0.000719 316 9.69 0.04 0.1 0.45
dBi
SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.99770 2 9.69 0.11 0.3 3.15

0
SM

PTP 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.276058 2 9.69 0.06 0.1 0.87

SM

Gain of antenna in dBi = 10*log (G).

The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power
in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging.

At EU 5.8 GHz the products are generally limited to a fixed EIRP which can be achieved
with the Integrated Antenna. The calculations above assume that the maximum EIRP
allowed by the regulations is being transmitted.

Table 6-13 Force 300-25 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz (EIRP 36 dBm)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R (m)

Type Bandwidth (W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 0.012589 316 10 0.18 0.2

SM dBi

PTP 80 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 0.012589 316 10 0.18 0.2

SM dBi

Note

If there are no EIRP limits in the country of installation, use the distance calculations in
Table 6-14 and Table 6-15.

PAGE 6-68
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Table 6-14 Force 300-25 Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz (full Tx power)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d R

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (m) (m)

PTP 20 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.794 316 10 1.41 2.0

SM

PTP 80 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.794 316 10 1.41 2.0

SM

Table 6-15 Force 300-25 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz (full Tx power)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d R

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (m) (m)

PTP 20 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.794 316 10 1.41 2.0

SM

PTP 80 MHz Integrated Dish, 25 dBi 0.794 316 10 1.41 2.0

SM

Table 6-16 through Table 6-20 below list the power compliance margins for the following Force 300-16
devices:

Part Number FCC ID Industry Canada

C058910C112A Z8H89FT0016 109W-0016

C058910C114A

PAGE 6-69
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Table 6-16 Force 300-16 Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz, FCC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R

Type Bandwidth (m)
(W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.021 40 10 0.08 0.1

SM

PTP 80 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.013 40 10 0.06 0.1

SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.678 2 10 0.09 0.1

SM

PTP 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.089 2 10 0.03 0.1

SM

Table 6-17 Force 300-16 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz, FCC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R

Type Bandwidth (m)
(W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.830 40 10 0.51 0.7

SM

PTP 80 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.1 40 10 0.18 0.3

SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.830 2 10 0.11 0.3

SM

PTP 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.389 2 10 0.07 0.1

SM

PAGE 6-70
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Table 6-18 Force 300-16 Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz, ISEDC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R (m) S @ 20

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) cm
(W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Patch Array, 16 0.021 40 9.01 0.09 0.1 1.69

dBi
SM

PTP 80 MHz Patch Array, 16 0.013 40 9.01 0.07 0.1 1.02

dBi
SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.678 2 9.01 0.10 0.3 2.14

SM

PTP 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.089 2 9.01 0.04 0.1 0.28

SM

Table 6-19 Force 300-16 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz, ISEDC

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d R (m) S @ 20 cm

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (m) (W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.830 40 9.69 0.18 0.3 65.72
SM

PTP 80 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.1 40 9.69 0.18 0.3 7.92
SM

PTP 20 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.830 2 9.69 0.10 0.2 2.62

SM

PTP 80 MHz On-board, 2 dBi 0.389 2 9.69 0.07 0.1 1.23

SM

Note

Gain of antenna in dBi = 10*log (G).

The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power
in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging.

At EU 5.8 GHz the products are generally limited to a fixed EIRP which can be achieved
with the Integrated Antenna. The calculations above assume that the maximum EIRP
allowed by the regulations is being transmitted.

PAGE 6-71
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY STANDARDS
INFORMATION

Table 6-20 Force 300-16 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz (EIRP 36 dBm)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d (m) R (m)

Type Bandwidth (W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.1 40 10 0.18 0.3

SM

PTP 80 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.1 40 10 0.18 0.3

SM

Note

If there are no EIRP limits in the country of installation, use the distance calculations in
Table 6-21 and Table 6-22.

Table 6-21 Force 300-16 Power compliance margins, 5.1 GHz (full Tx power)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d R

Type Bandwidth (W/m2) (m) (m)

PTP 20 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.794 40 10 0.5 1.0

SM

PTP 80 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.794 40 10 0.5 1.0

SM

Table 6-22 Force 300-16 Power compliance margins, 5.8 GHz (full Tx power)

Conn Channel Antenna P (W) G S d R

Type Bandwidth (m) (m)
(W/m2)

PTP 20 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.794 40 10 0.5 1.0

SM

PTP 80 MHz Patch Array, 16 dBi 0.794 40 10 0.5 1.0

SM

PAGE 6-72
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH RADIO REGULATIONS
INFORMATION

This section describes how the ePMP complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various
countries.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium Networks could void

the user’s authority to operate the system.

This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the
system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency
bands in which the system operates may be unlicensed and, in these bands, the system can be used
provided it does not cause interference. The system is not guaranteed protection against interference
from other products and installations.

The radio specification type approvals that have been granted for ePMP frequency variants are listed
under Table 6-23.

Table 6-23 Force 300-25 Radio certifications

Frequency band Region Regulatory approvals

5 GHz USA FCC Part 15 Class B

Canada IC RSS-210 Issue 8, Annex 8 (or latest)

IC RSS247 Issue 1 (May 2015)

Europe ETSI EN302 502 v1.2.1

ETSI EN301 893 v1.7.1

PAGE 6-73
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH RADIO REGULATIONS
INFORMATION

The system has been tested for compliance to both US (FCC) and European (ETSI) specifications. It has
been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious radiation for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA and appropriate European ENs. These limits have been
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference. However the equipment can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to other radio communications. There is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. To comply with FCC RF exposure limits for general population or
uncontrolled exposure, the antenna(s) used for the ePMP transmitter must be installed to ensure a
separation distance specified in Table 6-3 through Table 6-22 from all persons and must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

The ePMP Module is certified for integration into products only by OEM integrators under the following
conditions:

1. The antenna(s) must be installed such that a minimum separation distance specified in Table 6-3
through Table 6-22 is maintained between the radiator (antenna) and all persons at all times.

2. The transmitter module must not be co-located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter. As long as the two conditions above are met, further transmitter testing is not required.
However, the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end-product for any additional
compliance requirements required with this module installed (for example, digital device emissions,
PC peripheral requirements, etc.).

In the event that these conditions cannot be met (for certain configurations or co-
location with another transmitter), then the FCC and Industry Canada authorizations
are no longer considered valid and the FCC ID cannot be used.

A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential

environment, notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments.

Notwithstanding that Cambium Networks has designed (and qualified) the ePMP
products to generally meet the Class B requirement to minimize the potential for
interference, the ePMP product range is not marketed for use in a residential
environment.

The ePMP Module is labeled with its own FCC ID and IC Certification Number. If the FCC ID and IC
Certification Number are not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside
of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed
module. In that case, the final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following:

PAGE 6-74
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE COMPLIANCE WITH RADIO REGULATIONS
INFORMATION

Table 6-24 ePMP product labeling

Device Label

ePMP 3000 Access “Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: Z8H89FT0024” or “Contains FCC ID:
Point Z8H89FT0024”

Force 300-25 “Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: Z8H89FT0017” or “Contains FCC ID:
Z8H89FT0017”

Force 300-16 “Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: Z8H89FT0016” or “Contains FCC ID:
Z8H89FT0016”

PAGE 6-75
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE NOTIFICATIONS
INFORMATION

This section contains notifications of compliance with the radio regulations that are enforced in various
regions.

The ePMP complies with the regulations that are enforced in the USA, Canada and Europe. The relevant
notifications are specified in this section.

U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) Notification.

This device complies with part 15.407 of the US FCC Rules and Regulations and with RSS-210 Issue 8 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. In Canada, users must be cautioned to take note that high power
radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 – 5350 MHz and 5470 – 5725
MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to license-exempt local area networks
(LELAN). To comply with FCC/IC RF exposure limits for general population or uncontrolled exposure,
the antenna(s) used for the ePMP transmitter must be installed at a separation distance specified in
Table 6-3 through Table 6-24.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with these instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment on and off, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:

• Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit;
• Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver
is connected to;
• Consult the dealer and/or experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label (Figure 64).

The ePMP Module is labeled with its own FCC ID and IC Certification Number. If the FCC ID and IC
Certification Number are not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside
of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed
module. In that case, the final end product must be labeled in a visible area with the following:

PAGE 6-76
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE NOTIFICATIONS
INFORMATION

Table 6-25 Product labeling

Device Label

ePMP 3000 Access “Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: Z8H89FT0024” or “Contains FCC ID:
Point Z8H89FT0024”

Force 300-25 “Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: Z8H89FT0017” or “Contains FCC ID:
Z8H89FT0017”

Force 300-16 “Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: Z8H89FT0016” or “Contains FCC ID:
Z8H89FT0016”

ePMP MP 3000 “Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: Z8H89FT0051” or “Contains FCC ID:
Z8H89FT0051”

Figure 64 FCC and IC certifications on 5 GHz product labels

PAGE 6-77
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE NOTIFICATIONS
INFORMATION

Wherever necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate
this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Contact the
appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and
any exceptions that might apply.

PAGE 6-78
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE NOTIFICATIONS
INFORMATION

This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the
system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency
band in which the system operates is “license exempt” and the system is allowed to be used provided it
does not cause interference. The licensing authority does not guaranteed protection against
interference from other products and installations.

This device complies with part 15 of the US FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off, the user is
encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit;
• Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver
is connected to;
• Consult the dealer and/or experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B conforme á la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

RSS-GEN issue 3 (7.1.3) Licence-Exempt Radio Apparatus:

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit
pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioé
lectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

In Canada, high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of the 5650 –
5850 MHz spectrum. These radars could cause interference or damage to license-exempt local area
network (LE-LAN) devices.

PAGE 6-79
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE NOTIFICATIONS
INFORMATION

FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label (Figure 41).

Figure 65 FCC and IC certifications on 5.8 GHz product label

PAGE 6-80
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE NOTIFICATIONS
INFORMATION

Wherever necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate
this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Contact the
appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and
any exceptions that might apply.

PAGE 6-81
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE RADIO SPECIFICATIONS
INFORMATION

For up-to-date performance and mechanical specifications for

ePMP products, please visit:

https://www.cambiumnetworks.com/products/pmp-
distribution/

PAGE 6-82
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE GLOSSARY
INFORMATION

Term Definition

AES Advanced Encryption Standard

ANSI American National Standards Institute

CINR Carrier to Interference plus Noise Ratio

CMM Cluster Management Module

DFS Dynamic Frequency Selection

EIRP Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMD Electromagnetic Discharge

ETH Ethernet

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

FCC Federal Communications Commission

FEC Forward Error Correction

GUI Graphical User Interface

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

IC Industry Canada

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IP Internet Protocol

LAN Local Area Network

LED Light Emitting Diode

LOS Line of Sight

MIMO Multiple In Multiple Out

MIR Maximum Information Rate

MU-MIMO Multi-User Multiple In Multiple Out

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit

PAGE 6-83
CHAPTER 6: LEGAL AND REFERENCE GLOSSARY
INFORMATION

Term Definition

nLOS Near Line of Sight

NTP Network Time Protocol

OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

PC Personal Computer

PMP Point to Multipoint

PTP Point to Point

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keyed

RF Radio Frequency

RMA Return Merchandise Authorization

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication

RTTT Road Transport and Traffic Telematics

RX Receive

SAR Standard Absorption Rate

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SW Software

TDD Time Division Duplex

TDWR Terminal Doppler Weather Radar

TX Transmit

UNII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure

URL Uniform Resource Locator

PAGE 6-84